Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000 System 9.14.2.0 April 2019 Rev.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2018 - 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................32 Audience.............................................................................................................................................................................. 32 Conventions........................................................................................................................................................................
Moving a Command from EXEC Privilege Mode to EXEC Mode.................................................................... 55 Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands................................................................................. 55 Allowing Access to Different Modes...................................................................................................................... 55 Applying a Privilege Level to a Username...........................................................
Enabling 802.1X..................................................................................................................................................................82 Configuring dot1x Profile ................................................................................................................................................83 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile..........................................................................................................
Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane)...................................................................................................117 IP Prefix Lists.....................................................................................................................................................................117 Configuration Task List for Prefix Lists................................................................................................................ 118 ACL Remarks.............
Enabling four-byte autonomous system numbers..............................................................................................176 Changing a BGP router ID........................................................................................................................................177 Configuring AS4 Number Representations.......................................................................................................... 177 Configuring a BGP peer...................................
Unified Forwarding Table (UFT) Modes.....................................................................................................................231 Configuring UFT Modes........................................................................................................................................... 231 Chapter 11: Control Plane Policing (CoPP)................................................................................ 233 Configure Control Plane Policing................................
DCBx Example............................................................................................................................................................264 DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions................................................................................................................... 265 Configuring DCBx.....................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the Hash Algorithm............................................................................................................................ 304 Enabling Deterministic ECMP Next Hop............................................................................................................. 304 Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed................................................................................................................. 305 Link Bundle Monitoring............................
Creating the FRRP Group....................................................................................................................................... 336 Configuring the Control VLAN...............................................................................................................................336 Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs......................................................................................................337 Setting the FRRP Timers......................
Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode................................................................................................................ 370 Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode................................................................................................................. 370 Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode...................................................................................................................371 Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode................
Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces.......................................................................................................... 402 Set Auto-Negotiation Options............................................................................................................................... 403 View Advanced Interface Information....................................................................................................................... 404 Configuring the Interface Sampling Size...
IPv6 Headers..............................................................................................................................................................426 Longest Prefix Match (LPM) Table and IPv6 /65 – /128 support...............................................................426 IPv6 Header Fields.................................................................................................................................................... 427 Extension Header Fields.................
Interface Support......................................................................................................................................................454 Adjacencies.................................................................................................................................................................454 Graceful Restart.....................................................................................................................................................
Manage the MAC Address Table................................................................................................................................. 491 Clearing the MAC Address Table........................................................................................................................... 491 Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries.......................................................................................................491 Configuring a Static MAC Address...........
Chapter 29: Microsoft Network Load Balancing.........................................................................525 Configuring a Switch for NLB .................................................................................................................................... 526 Enabling a Switch for Multicast NLB................................................................................................................... 527 Chapter 30: Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)................
Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations.......................................................................................................561 Chapter 32: Multicast Features................................................................................................. 563 Enabling IP Multicast..................................................................................................................................................... 563 Implementation Information.............................
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID Globally......................................................................................613 Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF....................................................................................614 Configuring Stub Areas............................................................................................................................................ 614 Configuring Passive-Interface......................................
Flow-Based Monitoring................................................................................................................................................. 652 Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring...........................................................................................................................653 Configuring IPv6 Flow-Based Mirroring.............................................................................................................. 655 Remote Port Mirroring...........
Displaying egress–queue Statistics...................................................................................................................... 698 Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space.............................................................................................................. 698 Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second.......................................................................... 699 Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping...........................
Chapter 45: Security................................................................................................................. 734 AAA Accounting...............................................................................................................................................................734 Configuration Task List for AAA Accounting......................................................................................................734 AAA Authentication...............................
Startup Configuration Verification........................................................................................................................ 784 Configuring the root User Password....................................................................................................................785 Enabling User Lockout for Failed Login Attempts.............................................................................................786 Chapter 46: Service Provider Bridging..................
Set up SNMP.................................................................................................................................................................... 813 Creating a Community.............................................................................................................................................. 813 Setting Up User-Based Security (SNMPv3).......................................................................................................
MIB objects for configuring MAC addresses......................................................................................................847 MIB support for MAC notification traps....................................................................................................................848 Configuring SNMP traps for new MAC learning or station–move..................................................................... 848 Manage VLANs using SNMP...................................................
Chapter 50: Storm Control........................................................................................................ 878 Configure Storm Control...............................................................................................................................................878 Configuring Storm Control from INTERFACE Mode........................................................................................ 878 Configuring Storm Control from CONFIGURATION Mode.....................
Configuring NTP control key password...............................................................................................................909 Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization.........................................................909 Dell EMC Networking OS Time and Date................................................................................................................. 909 Configuration Task List ..........................................................
Enhanced VLT............................................................................................................................................................938 Configure Virtual Link Trunking...................................................................................................................................939 Important Points to Remember.............................................................................................................................
Dell-4 VLT Configuration....................................................................................................................................... 1003 Chapter 60: Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN)........................................................................... 1004 Components of VXLAN network...............................................................................................................................1005 Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway.............................
Chapter 62: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP).........................................................1051 VRRP Overview..............................................................................................................................................................1051 VRRP Benefits............................................................................................................................................................... 1052 VRRP Implementation........................
Chapter 65: X.509v3................................................................................................................ 1108 Introduction to X.509v3 certificates.........................................................................................................................1108 X.509v3 support in .......................................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6000 platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.0(2.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
● EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. ● EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
Table 1.
Table 1.
Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:00:66:64 Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------0 Management online S4810 S4810 9.4(0.
Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: ● To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword. ● Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords. The output of this command is the same as the help command.
Short-Cut Key Action Combination CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word. Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word. Command History The Dell EMC Networking OS maintains a history of previously-entered commands for each mode.
Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command. Example of the find Keyword The display command displays additional configuration information. The no-more command displays the output all at once rather than one screen at a time.
DellEMC(conf-alias-definition)# alias ns no shutdown DellEMC(conf-alias-definition)# alias 10gint interface TenGigabitEthernet $1 Viewing alias configuration To view the Alias configurations, use the following commands: 1. Display the complete list of aliases and its definitions.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port. Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
Accessing the System Remotely You can configure the system to access it remotely by Telnet or secure shell (SSH). ● The platform has a dedicated management port and a management routing table that is separate from the IP routing table. ● You can manage all Dell EMC Networking products in-band via the front-end data ports through interfaces assigned an IP address as well. Accessing the System Remotely Configuring the system for remote access is a three-step process, as described in the following topics: 1.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret | sha256– password} [encryption-type] password [dynamic-salt]] [privilege level] [role role-name] ○ name: Enter a text string upto 63 characters long. ○ access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. ○ nopassword: Allows you to configure an user without the password. ○ password: Allows you to configure an user with a password. ○ secret: Specify a secret string for an user.
￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 0 is to input the password in clear text. 5 is to input a password that is already encrypted using MD5 encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. 7 is to input a password that is already encrypted using DES encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. 8 is to input a password that is already encrypted using sha256-based encryption method.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 26292881 bytes successfully copied Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system. You can perform file operations on an NFS mounted file system using supported file commands. This feature allows an NFS mounted device to be recognized as a file system.
User name to login remote host: username Password to login remote host: ! Example of Copying to NFS Mount DellEMC#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:///username/snoop.pcap ! 24 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy tftp://10.16.127.
Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, see the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. Viewing Files You can only view file information and content on local file systems. To view a list of files or the contents of a file, use the following commands. ● View a list of files on the internal flash.
Managing the File System The Dell EMC Networking system can use the internal Flash, external Flash, or remote devices to store files. The system stores files on the internal Flash by default but can be configured to store files elsewhere. To view file system information, use the following command. ● View information about each file system.
Using HTTP for File Transfers Stating with Release 9.3(0.1), you can use HTTP to copy files or configuration details to a remote server. To transfer files to an external server, use the copy source-file-url http://host[:port]/file-path command. Enter the following source-file-url keywords and information: ● To copy a file from the internal FLASH, enter flash:// followed by the filename. ● To copy the running configuration, enter the keyword running-config.
To validate the software image on the flash drive after the image is transferred to the system, but before you install the image, use the verify {md5 | sha256} [ flash://]img-file [hash-value] command in EXEC mode. ● md5: MD5 message-digest algorithm ● sha256: SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm ● flash: (Optional) Specifies the flash drive. The default uses the flash drive. You can enter the image file name. ● hash-value: (Optional). Specify the relevant hash published on iSupport.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below. Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
CONFIGURATION mode privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...|| command-keyword} ● Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
vlan VLAN keyword DellEMC(conf)# interface group vlan 1 - 2 , tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# end Applying a Privilege Level to a Username To set the user privilege level, use the following command. ● Configure a privilege level for a user. CONFIGURATION mode username username privilege level Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line To set a privilege level for a terminal line, use the following command.
● Clearing Audit Logs Enabling Audit and Security Logs You enable audit and security logs to monitor configuration changes or determine if these changes affect the operation of the system in the network. You log audit and security events to a system log server, using the logging extended command in CONFIGURATION mode. Audit Logs The audit log contains configuration events and information. The types of information in this log consist of the following: ● User logins to the switch.
May 12 12:20:42: DellEMC#: %CLI-6-service timestamps log datetime by admin from vty0 (10.14.1.98) For information about the logging extended command, see Enabling Audit and Security Logs Example of the show logging Command for Security DellEMC#show logging Jun 10 04:23:40: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user admin on line vty0 ( 10.14.1.91 ) Clearing Audit Logs To clear audit logs, use the clear logging auditlog command in Exec mode.
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1. On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2. On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
Track Login Activity Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events. When you log in using the console or VTY line, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user and the number of unsuccessful login attempts since your last successful login to the system, and whether the current user’s permissions have changed since the last login.
Example of the show login statistics all command The show login statistics all command displays the successful and failed login details of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC#show login statistics all -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 08:54:28 UTC Wed Mar 23 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user login-id command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user admin There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics successful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics successful-attempts There were 4 successful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s).
Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: When you try to create more than the permitted number of sessions, the following message appears, prompting you to close one of the existing sessions. If you close any of the existing sessions, you are allowed to login. $ telnet 10.11.178.17 Trying 10.11.178.17... Connected to 10.11.178.17.
logging trap level ● Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the syslog history table. CONFIGURATION mode logging history level ● Specify the size of the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode logging buffered size NOTE: When you decrease the buffer size, Dell EMC Networking OS deletes all messages stored in the buffer. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages in the buffer. ● Specify the number of messages that Dell EMC Networking OS saves to its logging history table.
To view any changes made, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode. Configuring a UNIX Logging Facility Level You can save system log messages with a UNIX system logging facility. To configure a UNIX logging facility level, use the following command. ● Specify one of the following parameters.
1. Enter LINE mode. CONFIGURATION mode line {console 0 | vty number [end-number] | aux 0} Configure the following parameters for the virtual terminal lines: ● number: the range is from zero (0) to 8. ● end-number: the range is from 1 to 8. You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2. Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print.
Configuration Task List for File Transfer Services The configuration tasks for file transfer services are: ● Enable FTP Server (mandatory) ● Configure FTP Server Parameters (optional) ● Configure FTP Client Parameters (optional) Enabling the FTP Server To enable the system as an FTP server, use the following command. To view FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode. ● Enable FTP on the system.
CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp source-interface interface ● Configure a password. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp password password ● Enter a username to use on the FTP client. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp username name To view the FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Enable FTP Server. Terminal Lines You can access the system remotely and restrict access to the system by creating user profiles.
ip access-list extended testdeny seq 10 deny ip 30.1.1.
line vty 1 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 2 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist DellEMC(config-line-vty)# Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell EMC Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. ● Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY.
login: admin DellEMC# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. ● Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set auto-lock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
BOOT_USER# reload NOTE: You must manually enter each CLI command. The system rejects a command if you copy and paste it in the command line. 5. Configure a new password. CONFIGURATION mode enable {secret | password} 6. Save the change in the running configuration to the startup configuration. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config Recovering from a Forgotten Enable Password Use the following commands if you forget the enable password. 1. Log onto the system using the console. 2.
BOOT_USER# boot change default 5. Reboot the chassis. BOOT_USER mode reload Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring the factory-default settings deletes the existing NVRAM settings, startup configuration, and all configured settings such as, stacking or fanout. To restore the factory default settings, use the restore factory-defaults stack-unit {stack—unit—number | all} {clear-all | nvram | bootvar} command in EXEC Privilege mode. CAUTION: There is no undo for this command.
1. Power-cycle the chassis (pull the power cord and reinsert it). 2. Press esc key to abort the boot process (while the system prompts to) You enter BLI immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER # prompt. press any key 3. Assign the new location of the Dell EMC Networking OS image to be used when the system reloads.
Enter the stack-unit keyword and the keyword all to view the reason for the last system reboot of all stack units in the stack. DellEMC#show reset-reason Cause : Reset by User through CLI command Reset Time: 11/05/2017-08:36 DellEMC# show reset-reason stack-unit 1 Cause : Reset by User through CLI command Reset Time: 11/05/2017-08:36 Disabling Syslog Messages for SNMP Authentication Failure Events The system generates syslog messages for SNMP authentication events.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
● The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. ● The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network. It translates and forwards requests and responses between the authentication server and the supplicant.
Figure 5. EAP Port-Authentication EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Configuring 802.1X Configuring 802.1X on a port is a one-step process. For more information, refer to Enabling 802.1X. Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port Re-Authenticating a Port Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Guest VLAN Configuring an Authentication-Fail VLAN Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports 802.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode.
no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
● Configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile. DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) mac mac-address mac-address — Enter the keyword mac and type up to the 48– bit MAC addresses using the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. A maximum of 6 MAC addresses are allowed. The following example configures 2 MAC addresses and then displays these addresses.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Authenticated Idle Configuring Critical VLAN By default, critical-VLAN is not configured. If authentication fails because of a server which is not reachable, user session is authenticated under critical-VLAN. To configure a critical-VLAN for users or devices when authenticating server is not reachable, use the following command.
INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) The default is 30. ● Configure the maximum number of times the authenticator re-transmits a Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x max-eap-req number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The example in Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame after 90 seconds and re-transmits for 10 times.
Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: ● ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. ● ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period. DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#dot1x reauthentication interval 7200 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#dot1x reauth-max 10 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#do show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 802.
Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional).
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
● If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins. Configuring a Guest VLAN If the supplicant does not respond within a determined amount of time ([reauth-max + 1] * tx-period, the system assumes that the host does not have 802.1X capability and the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. NOTE: For more information about configuring timeouts, refer to Configuring Timeouts.
Example of Viewing Configured Authentication 802.
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements.
The ACL manager does not notify the ACL agent in the following cases: ● The ACL VLAN group is created. ● The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. ● The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. ● The description of the ACL group is added or removed.
acl-vlan-group {group name} 2. Add a description to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode description description 3. Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4. Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5. Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
EXEC Privilege mode DellEMC#show cam-usage switch Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|============|============|============= 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL subpartitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode.
2 | | | | | | | | | | | | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL 3 0 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands. By default, zero groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You must also allocate the slices for CAM optimization. To display the number of FP blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services, use the show cam-acl-vlan command. After you configure the ACL VLAN groups, reboot the system to store the settings in nonvolatile storage.
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• • • • • • • • • Applying an IP ACL Configure Ingress ACLs Configure Egress ACLs IP Prefix Lists ACL Remarks ACL Resequencing Route Maps Configuring UDF ACL Configuring IP Mirror Access Group IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
CAM Optimization When you enable this command, if a policy map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). When you disable this command, the system behaves as described in this chapter. Test CAM Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS optimization for IPv6 ACLs.
ACL Optimization If an access list contains duplicate entries, Dell EMC Networking OS deletes one entry to conserve CAM space. Standard and extended ACLs take up the same amount of CAM space. A single ACL rule uses two CAM entries to identify whether the access list is a standard or extended ACL.
Configuration Task List for Route Maps Configure route maps in ROUTE-MAP mode and apply the maps in various commands in ROUTER RIP and ROUTER OSPF modes. The following list includes the configuration tasks for route maps, as described in the following sections.
level stub-area DellEMC# The following example shows a route map with multiple instances. The show config command displays only the configuration of the current route map instance. To view all instances of a specific route map, use the show route-map command.
Configuring Match Routes To configure match criterion for a route map, use the following commands. ● Match routes with the same AS-PATH numbers. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match as-path as-path-name ● Match routes with COMMUNITY list attributes in their path. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match community community-list-name [exact] ● Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface.
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of match commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of match filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configuring Set Conditions To configure a set condition, use the following commands. ● Add an AS-PATH number to the beginning of the AS-PATH. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set as-path prepend as-number [...
a routing protocol. Other attributes that can be changed include the metric type (for example, external and internal route types in OSPF) and route tag. Use the redistribute command in OSPF, RIP, ISIS, and BGP to set some of these attributes for routes that are redistributed into those protocols. Route maps add to that redistribution capability by allowing you to match specific routes and set or change more attributes when redistributing those routes.
IP Fragment Handling Dell EMC Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp). ● Both standard and extended ACLs support IP fragments. ● Second and subsequent fragments are allowed because a Layer 4 rule cannot be applied to these fragments.
Example of Permitting All Packets from a Specified Host DellEMC(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.1 any eq 24 DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any any fragment DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl) In the following example, the TCP packets that are first fragments or non-fragmented from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted. Additionally, all TCP non-first fragments from host 10.1.1.1 are permitted.
seq 20 seq 25 seq 30 seq 35 seq 40 seq 45 seq 50 DellEMC# deny deny deny deny deny deny deny 10.4.0.0 /16 10.5.0.0 /16 10.6.0.0 /16 10.7.0.0 /16 10.8.0.0 /16 10.9.0.0 /16 10.10.0.0 /16 The following example shows how the seq command orders the filters according to the sequence number assigned. In the example, filter 25 was configured before filter 15, but the show config command displays the filters in the correct order. DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#seq 25 deny ip host 10.5.0.
seq 50 permit tcp 10.8.0.0 /16 10.50.188.118 /31 eq 49 monitor 349 seq 55 permit udp 10.15.1.0 /24 10.50.188.118 /31 range 1812 1813 To delete a filter, enter the show config command in IP ACCESS LIST mode and locate the sequence number of the filter you want to delete. Then use the no seq sequence-number command in IP ACCESS LIST mode.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] The ICMP packets cannot be filtered using mirroring ACL.
Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for TCP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for TCP packets.
{deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality. For example, you can take ACL “ABCD” and apply it using the in keyword and it becomes an ingress access list. If you apply the same ACL using the out keyword, it becomes an egress access list. If you apply the same ACL to the Loopback interface, it becomes a Loopback access list. Applying an IP ACL To apply an IP ACL (standard or extended) to a physical or port channel interface, use the following commands. 1.
Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation. To create an ingress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows applying the ACL, rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list.
DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#end DellEMC#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on tengigabitethernet 0/0 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.
The following examples show permit or deny filters for specific routes using the le and ge parameters, where x.x.x.x/x represents a route prefix: ● To deny only /8 prefixes, enter deny x.x.x.x/x ge 8 le 8. ● To permit routes with the mask greater than /8 but less than /12, enter permit x.x.x.x/x ge 8. ● To deny routes with a mask less than /24, enter deny x.x.x.x/x le 24. ● To permit routes with a mask greater than /20, enter permit x.x.x.x/x ge 20.
The following example shows how the seq command orders the filters according to the sequence number assigned. In the example, filter 20 was configured before filter 15 and 12, but the show config command displays the filters in the correct order. DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#seq 20 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#seq 12 deny 134.23.0.0 /16 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#seq 15 deny 120.23.14.0 /8 le 16 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#show config ! ip prefix-list juba seq 12 deny 134.23.0.0/16 seq 15 deny 120.0.0.
show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name] The following example shows the show ip prefix-list detail command. DellEMC>show ip prefix detail Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 1.102.0.0/16 le 32 (hit count: 0) seq 6 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0) seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 0) ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 100.100.1.
Applying a Filter to a Prefix List (OSPF) To apply a filter to routes in open shortest path first (OSPF), use the following commands. ● Enter OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf ● Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] ● Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes.
The following example shows how to write a remark for an ACL rule: Dell(config-ext-nacl)#ip access-list extended test Dell(config-ext-nacl)# remark permit any ip Dell(config-ext-nacl)# seq 10 permit ip any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#sh config ! ip access-list extended test remark 10 permit any ip seq 10 permit ip any any Deleting a Remark To delete a remark, follow this procedure: A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion.
Table 7. ACL Resequencing (continued) Rules Resquencing Rules After Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 10 permit any host 1.1.1.2 seq 15 permit any host 1.1.1.3 seq 20 permit any host 1.1.1.4 Resequencing an ACL or Prefix List Resequencing is available for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs, prefix lists, and MAC ACLs. To resequence an ACL or prefix list, use the following commands. You must specify the list name, starting number, and increment when using these commands.
remark 9 ABC remark 10 this remark corresponds to permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 15 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 20 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 DellEMC# end DellEMC# resequence access-list ipv4 test 2 2 DellEMC# show running-config acl ! ip access-list extended test remark 2 XYZ remark 4 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 4 permit ip any host 1.1.1.1 remark 6 this remark has no corresponding rule remark 8 this remark corresponds to permit ip any host 1.
show cam-acl DellEMC#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 2 FcoeAcl : 4 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 2 FcoeAcl : 4 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ip
key innerL3header udf-id 6 packetbase innerL3Header offset 0 length 2 DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)# 7. Configure the match criteria for the packet type in which UDF offset bytes are parsed. CONFIGURATION-UDF TCAM mode match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol value vlantag tagStatus DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)#match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol 4 vlantag any 8. View the UDF TCAM configuration.
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number [vman-qos | vman-qos—dual— number | vman-qos—dual—fp number] ipv4pbr number} ecfmacl number [nlbclusteraclnumber]fcoeacl number iscsioptacl number ipv4udfmirracl number | ipv4mirracl number} 2. Create a monitor session. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-ID [type { rpm | erpm [set ip dscp dscp_value | set ip ttl ttl_value]}] [drop] Dell(conf)#monitor session 65535 type erpm 3.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
State Description Init The local system is communicating. Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: ● A control packet is not received within the detection time. ● Sufficient echo packets are lost. ● Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
● ● ● ● ● Configure BFD for OSPFv3 Configure BFD for IS-IS Configure BFD for BGP Configure BFD for VRRP Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. Figure 12. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. ● Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
Example Configuration and Verification The following example contains static routes for both default and nondefault VRFs. Dell#sh run | grep bfd bfd enable ip route bfd prefix-list p4_le ip route bfd vrf vrf1 ip route bfd vrf vrf2 ip route bfd vrf vrf1 prefix-list p4_le The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF.
Prefix lists are used in route maps and route filtering operations. You can use prefix lists as an alternative to existing access lists (ACLs). A prefix is a portion of the IP address. Prefix lists constitute any number of bits in an IP address starting from the far left bit of the far left octet. By specifying the exactly number of bits in an IP address that belong to a prefix list, the prefix list can be used to aggregate addresses and perform some functions; for example, redistribution.
no ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] Configure BFD for IPv6 Static Routes BFD offers systems a link state detection mechanism for static routes. With BFD, systems are notified to remove static routes from the routing table as soon as the link state change occurs, rather than waiting until packets fail to reach their next hop. Configuring BFD for IPv6 static routes is a three-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2.
ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf-name [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] Example Configuration and Verification The following example contains static routes for both default and nondefault VRFs. Dell#show run | grep bfd bfd enable ipv6 route bfd prefix-list p6_le ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf1 ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf2 ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf1 prefix-list p6_le The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF.
Changing IPv6 Static Route Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all static routes. If you change a parameter, the change affects all sessions for static routes. To change parameters for static route sessions, use the following command . ● Change parameters for all static route sessions.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Enable BFD globally.
The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 Te 2/2 Up 100 100 3 O Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, follow this procedure: ● Enable BFD globally.
* * * * 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.139 Te Te Te Te 1/42 1/43 1/38 1/42 Up Up Up Up 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 3 3 3 3 VT VT VT VT DellEMC# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.2 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:02:15:0e Remote Addr: 10.1.3.
ROUTER-OSPF mode no bfd all-neighbors ● Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on an interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors.
O3 DellEMC# Establishing BFD Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, use the following procedure: ● Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable ● Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors in a specific VRF. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode bfd all-neighbors ● Establish sessions with the OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface in a specific VRF.
511 O3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 101 Up 150 150 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 102 Up 150 150 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 DellEMC# fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 103 Up 150 150 3 Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: desired tx interval, required min rx interval, detection multiplier, and system role.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Changing IS-IS Session Parameters ● Disabling BFD for IS-IS Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors.
C I O R - CLI - ISIS - OSPF - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: ● By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). ● By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 6.
2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Specify the address family as IPv4. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name 4. Add an IPv4 BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 5. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 6.
Disabling BFD for BGP You can disable BFD for BGP. To disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the first command. To remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the second command. The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd all-neighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. ● Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
V - VRRP LocalAddr * 1.1.1.3 * 2.2.2.3 * 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 Interface Te 6/1 Te 6/2 Te 6/3 State Up Up Up Rx-int 200 200 200 Tx-int 200 200 200 Mult 3 3 3 Clients B B B The following example shows viewing BFD neighbors with full detail. The bold lines show the BFD session parameters: TX (packet transmission), RX (packet reception), and multiplier (maximum number of missed packets).
3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP.
vrrp bfd all-neighbors Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command. ● Establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor.
INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down control packet is sent to all neighbors and sessions on the remote system change to the Down state.
9 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. BGP Topology with autonomous systems (AS) BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
● All AS numbers between 0 and 65535 are represented as a decimal number, when entered in the CLI and when displayed in the show commands outputs. ● AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as .. For example: AS 65546 is represented as 1.10. ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS4 SUPPORT DISABLED DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs).
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Best Path Selection Criteria Paths for active routes are grouped in ascending order according to their neighboring external AS number (BGP best path selection is deterministic by default, which means the bgp non-deterministic-med command is NOT applied). The best path in each group is selected based on specific criteria. Only one “best path” is selected at a time. If any of the criteria results in more than one path, BGP moves on to the next option in the list.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. a. This comparison is only done if the first (neighboring) AS is the same in the two paths; the MEDs are compared only if the first AS in the AS_SEQUENCE is the same for both paths. b. If you entered the bgp always-compare-med command, MEDs are compared for all paths. c. Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths.
Figure 20. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 21. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
the unicast and multicast BGP database to form a routing table for unicast and multicast. You can configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI) in which MBGP routes is redistributed into BGP. The default is IPv4 unicast. IPv4 and IPv6 address family The IPv4 address family configuration in Dell EMC Networking OS is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv4 address. You can specify multicast within the IPv4 address family.
BGP global configuration default values By default, BGP is disabled. The following table displays the default values for BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS. Table 8. BGP Default Values Item Default BGP Neighbor Adjacency changes All BGP neighbor changes are logged.
● If the redistribute command has metric configured (route-map set metric or redistribute route-type metric) and the BGP peer outbound route-map has metric-type internal configured, BGP advertises the metric configured in the redistribute command as MED. ● If BGP peer outbound route-map has metric configured, all other metrics are overwritten by this configuration. NOTE: When redistributing static, connected, or OSPF routes, there is no metric option.
Figure 22. Before and After AS Number Migration with Local-AS Enabled When you complete your migration, and you have reconfigured your network with the new information, disable this feature. If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer. If you do not select “no prepend” (the default), the Local-AS is added to the first AS segment in the AS-PATH.
● Configure inbound BGP soft-reconfiguration on a peer for f10BgpM2PrefixInPrefixesRejected to display the number of prefixes filtered due to a policy. If you do enable BGP soft-reconfig, the denied prefixes are not accounted for. ● F10BgpM2AdjRibsOutRoute stores the pointer to the NLRI in the peer's Adj-Rib-Out. ● PA Index (f10BgpM2PathAttrIndex field in various tables) is used to retrieve specific attributes from the PA table.
Basic BGP configuration tasks The following sections describe how to configure a basic BGP network and the basic configuration tasks that are required for the BGP to be up and running.
neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address| peer-group name} remote-as as-number ● ip-address: IPv4 address of the neighbor ● ipv6-address: IPv6 address of the neighbor ● peer-group name: Name of the peer group. It can contain 16 characters. ● as-number: Autonomous number NOTE: Neighbors that are defined using the neighbor remote-as command in the CONFIGURATION-ROUTERBGP mode exchange IPv4 unicast address prefixes only. 3. Enable the BGP neighbor.
The third line of the show ip bgp neighbors output contains the BGP State. If anything other than ESTABLISHED is listed, the neighbor is not exchanging information and routes. For more information about using the show ip bgp neighbors command, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. The following example shows the show ip bgp neighbors command output. DellEMC#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 20.20.20.1, remote AS 20, external link BGP remote router ID 1.1.1.
1 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.1 AS 200 MsgRcvd 0 MsgSent 0 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:00:00 0 Changing a BGP router ID BGP uses the configured router ID to identify the devices in the network. By default, the router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface. If no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router is used as the BGP router ID.
bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell EMC Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. ● Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot ● Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
CONFIG mode router bgp as-number ● Add the IP address of the neighbor for the specified autonomous system. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6–address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number ● Enable the neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name no shutdown ● Specify the IPv4 address family configuration. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family ipv4 [multicast | vrf vrf-name] multicast — Specifies the IPv4 multicast address family.
To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers Example of enabling BGP in Router A Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router A. RouterA# configure terminal RouterA(conf)# router bgp 40000 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 10.1.1.99 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# timers bgp 80 130 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.
● You must create a peer group first before adding the neighbors in the peer group. ● If you remove any configuration parameters from a peer group, it will apply to all the neighbors configured under that peer group. ● If you have not configured a parameter for an individual neighbor in the peer group, the neighbor uses the value configured in the peer group. ● If you reset any parameter for an individual neighbor, it will override the value set in the peer group.
To add an internal BGP (IBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with the same BGP as-number configured in the router bgp as-number command. After you create a peer group, you can use any of the commands beginning with the keyword neighbor to configure that peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
Example-Configuring BGP peer groups The following example configurations show how to enable BGP and set up some peer groups. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. The following illustration shows the configurations described on the following examples.
R1(conf-if-gi-1/31)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip address 10.0.3.31/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-gi-1/31)#exit R1(conf)#ip route 192.168.128.2/32 10.0.1.22 R1(conf)#router bgp 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.
R3(conf-if-te-3/11)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/11)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/11)#int te 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.
Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 2) R2#conf R2(conf)#router bgp 99 R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CC no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer AAA R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer BBB R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
Advanced BGP configuration tasks The following sections describe how to configure the advanced (optional) BGP configuration tasks. Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect. Such resets cause undue interruption to traffic due to hard reset of the BGP cache and the time it takes to re-establish the session.
Route-refresh This section explains how the soft-reconfiguration and route-refresh works. Soft-reconfiguration has to be configured explicitly for a neighbor unlike route refresh, which is automatically negotiated between BGP peers when establishing a peer session. The route-refresh updates will be sent, only if the neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command is not configured in a BGP neighbor and when you do a soft reset using clear ip bgp {neighbor-address | peer-groupname} soft in command.
redistribute connected neighbor 20.1.1.2 remote-as 200 neighbor 20.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 20::2 remote-as 200 neighbor 20::2 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast redistribute connected neighbor 20::2 activate exit-address-family ! DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do clear ip bgp 20.1.1.2 soft in May 8 15:28:11 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 sending ROUTE_REFRESH AFI/SAFI (1/1) May 8 15:28:12 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 UPDATE rcvd packet len 56 May 8 15:28:12 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 rcvd UPDATE w/ attr: origin ?, path 200, nexthop 20.1.1.
○ suppress-map map-name-Create aggregate route by suppressing the advertisements of specific routes. ○ advertise-map map-name-Create aggregate route by advertising specific routes. Configuring BGP aggregate routes To create an aggregate route entry in the BGP routing table, use the following commands. The aggregate route is advertised from the autonomous system. ● Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number for the specific BGP routing process.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# aggregate-address 10.1.1.0/24 suppress-map map1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit DellEMC(conf)# The route-map named map1 can have any action such as permit and sequence number configured, so that the advertisement of aggregate routes can be suppressed based on the set action in the route-map. Following is the sample configuration to suppress the advertisement of specific aggregate routes to all neighbors.
As seen in the following example, the expressions are displayed when using the show commands. To view the AS-PATH ACL configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION AS-PATH ACL mode and the show ip as-pathaccess-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. For more information about this command and route filtering, refer to Filtering BGP Routes. The following example applies access list Eagle to routes inbound from BGP peer 10.5.5.2.
NOTE: When you configure a new set of BGP policies, to ensure the changes are made, always reset the neighbor or peer group by using the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. Filtering BGP using IP prefix lists An IP prefix lists contains a list of networks. When applying an IP prefix list to a BGP neighbor, you can able to send or receive the routes whose destination is in the IP prefix list. Filtering BGP routes based on IP prefix lists involves the following steps: ● Create a prefix list.
10.10.10.2. So the routes from 10.10.10.1/24 network is distributed to neighbor 10.10.10.2 since the IP prefix list route10 explicitly permits the routes to be distributed to the neighbor. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER BGP mode. To view a prefix list configuration, use the show ip prefix-list detail or show ip prefix-list summary commands in EXEC Privilege mode. Filtering BGP Routes Using Route Maps To filter routes using a route map, use these commands. 1.
To configure an AS-PATH ACL to filter a specific AS_PATH value, use these commands in the following sequence. 1. Assign a name to a AS-PATH ACL and enter AS-PATH ACL mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2. Enter the parameter to match BGP AS-PATH for filtering. CONFIG-AS-PATH mode {deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions.
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match {community community-list-name [exact] | extcommunity extcommunity-list-name [exact]} 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number AS-number: 0 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1 to 4294967295 (4-Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format) 5. Apply the route map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 fall-over DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# To verify that you enabled fast fall-over on a particular BGP neighbor, use the show ip bgp neighbors command. Because fast fall-over is disabled by default, it appears only if it has been enabled (shown in bold). DellEMC#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 10.10.10.1, remote AS 500, internal link Member of peer-group test for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 30.30.30.
neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor DellEMC# test peer-group test fall-over test no shutdown 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 10.10.10.1 fall-over 10.10.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 10.10.10.1 no shutdown Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message.
● Save all forwarding information base (FIB) and content addressable memory (CAM) entries on the line card and continue forwarding traffic while the secondary route processor module (RPM) is coming online. ● Advertise to all BGP neighbors and peer-groups that the forwarding state of all routes has been saved. This prompts all peers to continue saving the routes they receive and to continue forwarding traffic.
○ metric value: The value is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. ○ route-map map-name: Specify the name of a configured route map to be consulted before adding the ISIS route. ● Include specific OSPF routes into BGP. ROUTER BGP or CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_ AF mode redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: ○ ospf: Indicates that you are redistributing OSPF routes in BGP.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 add-path both 3 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# exit The above configuration example shows how to enable BGP additional paths to be sent and received with a maximum of two additional paths to the peers. You can configure the neighbor to send and receive additional paths using the neighbor add-pathcommand at the address family configuration level.
deny 702:667 deny 703:667 deny 704:666 deny 705:666 deny 14551:666 DellEMC# Configuring an IP Extended Community List To configure an IP extended community list, use these commands. 1. Create a extended community list and enter the EXTCOMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip extcommunity-list extcommunity-list-name 2. Two types of extended communities are supported.
Configure BGP attributes Following sections explain how to configure the BGP attributes such as MED, COMMUNITY, WEIGHT, and LOCAL_PREFERENCE. Changing MED Attributes By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses the MULTI_EXIT_DISC or MED attribute when comparing EBGP paths received from different BGP neighbors or peers from the same AS for the same route. You can configure the device to compare the MED attributes from neighbors or peers in different AS using the bgp always-compare-med command.
● community-number: use AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 or 4 Bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. ● local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED and are not sent to EBGP peers. ● no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE and are not advertised. ● no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. ● none: remove the COMMUNITY attribute. ● additive: add the communities to already existing communities. 3.
value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# bgp default local-preference 150 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# exit In the above example configuration, the default LOCAL_PREFERENCE value is changed to 150 for all the updates from AS 500 to AS 400. The default value is 100.
● Disable next hop processing and configure the router (route reflector) as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self [all] If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. ● Sets the next hop address.
○ number: Maximum number of parallel paths. The range is from 2 to 64. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# maximum-paths ibgp 5 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit In the above example configuration, the maximum number of parallel internal BGP routes is set to 5, so that only 5 routes can be installed in a routing table. The show ip bgp network command includes multipath information for that network.
● Assign a cluster ID or an IP address to a router reflector cluster. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp cluster-id ip-address | number ○ ip-address: IP address as the route reflector cluster ID. ○ number: A route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295. You can have multiple clusters in an AS. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors.
○ suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.) ○ max-suppress-time: the range is from 1 to 255. The maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The default is 60 minutes. ○ route-map map-name: name of a configured route map.
route-map Route-map to specify criteria for dampening To view a count of dampened routes, history routes, and penalized routes when you enable route dampening, look at the seventh line of the show ip bgp summary command output, as shown in the following example (bold). DellEMC>show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.114.8.
In the above example configuration, the BGP timers are set with keepalive time as 80 seconds with which the system sends keepalive messages to the BGP peer and holdtime as 120 seconds with which the system waits for a message from the BGP peer before concluding that the peer is dead. To view non-default values, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode.
2. Shut down the BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast address family using the following command: shutdown address-family-ipv4-unicast To enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to IPv4 multicast address family: 1. Enter the router bgp mode using the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2.
Match a Clause with a Continue Clause The continue feature can exist without a match clause. Without a match clause, the continue clause executes and jumps to the specified route-map entry. With a match clause and a continue clause, the match clause executes first and the continue clause next in a specified route map entry. The continue clause launches only after a successful match.
● Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number. CONFIG mode router bgp as-number ● Specify the IPv4 address family configuration. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family {ipv4 [multicast] | ipv6 unicast} vrf vrf-name vrf vrf-name — Specifies the name of VRF instance associated with the IPv4 or IPv6 address-family configuration. ● Add the IP address of the neighbor in the specified AS to the IPv4 MBGP neighbor table.
neighbor 50.0.0.2 activate exit-address-family ! address-family ipv6 unicast vrf vrf1 neighbor 50.0.0.2 activate exit-address-family DellEMC# Maintaining Existing AS Numbers During an AS Migration The local-as feature smooths out the BGP network migration operation and allows you to maintain existing ASNs during a BGP network migration. When you complete your migration, be sure to reconfigure your routers with the new information and disable this feature. ● Allow external routes from this neighbor.
○ peer-group-name: 16 characters. ○ Number: 1 through 10. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D and IPv6 adress: X:X:X:X::X. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. The lines shown in bold are the number of times ASN 65123 can appear in the AS path (allows–in 9). To disable this feature, use the no neighbor allow-as in number command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.
MBGP support for IPv6 MBGP suports IPv6 with same features and functionality as IPv4 BGP. MBGP for IPv6 supports IPv6 address-family and Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI) and next hop that uses IPv6 address. Configuring IPv6 MBGP between peers To configure IPv6 MBGP, use the following commands. Following are the steps to configure IPv6 MBGP between two peers. The neighbors that are configured using neighbor remote-as command exchange only the IPv4 unicast address prefixes.
Following is an example to enable BGP and address family configuration for the neighbor R2 (20.20.20.2) in the router R1. R1(conf)# router bgp 10 R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.2 remote-as 200 R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.2 no shutdown R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 2001::2 remote-as 200 R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 2001::2 no shutdown R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 30.30.30.1 remote-as 20 R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 30.30.30.
BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 2 neighbor(s) using 24576 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.2 2001::2 R1# AS 200 200 MsgRcvd 10 40 MsgSent 20 45 TblVer 0 0 InQ 0 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:06:11 0 0 00:03:14 0 Example of enabling BGP and address family configuration in router (R2) Following is an example to enable BGP and address family configuration for the neighbor R1 (20.20.20.1) in the router R2. R2(conf)# router bgp 200 R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 20.20.20.
existing address, is assigned to one of the peer interfaces, that address is not used as the NH until you flap the interface manually. Figure 26. Configure IPv6 NH to advertise IPv6 prefix over IPv4 neighbor To enable BGP to pick the next hop IPv6 address automatically for IPv6 prefix advertised over an IPv4 neighbor, use the following commands. ● Enable the system to pick the next hop IPv6 address dynamically for IPv6 prefix advertised over an IPv4 neighbor.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 activate DellECM(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# exit Following is the show running-config command output for the above configuration. DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 20 neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 655 neighbor 10.1.1.1 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast neighbor 10.1.1.1 activate exit-address-family ! Following is the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast command output for the above configuration.
EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] ● View information about BGP updates and filter by prefix name. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out] [prefix-list name] ● Enable soft-reconfiguration debug.
'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:26:02 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00160303 03010000 Last notification (len 21) received 00:26:20 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Last PDU (len 41) received 00:26:02 ago that caused notification to be issued ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290200 00000e01 02040201 00024003 04141414 0218c0a8 01000000 Local host: 1.1.1.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 1.1.1.
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies.
Table 11. Default Cam Allocation Settings (continued) CAM Allocation Setting ipv4pbr 0 vrfv4Acl 0 Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
The new cam region ipv6mirracl is introduced in the cam-acl command to configure dedicated FP CAM regions for the IPv6 mirror ACL entries. NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3. Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4. Reload the system.
Example of show running-config cam-profile Command Dell#show running-config cam-profile ! cam-profile default microcode default Dell# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 block = 128 entries 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Cu
Example of the show cam-usage Command DellEMC#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe|Pipeline| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-L3 ACL | 2304 | 1 | 2303 | | | IN-L3 ECMP GRP | 2048 | 0 | 2048 | | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-NLB ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IPMAC ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-V6-MIRRACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-L3-MIRR ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 |
Consider if the last CAM threshold was set to 90 percent and now you re-configure the CAM threshold to 80. And, if the current CAM usage is 85 percent, then the system displays the syslog message saying that the CAM usage is above the configured CAM threshold value. Table 13.
Syslog Error When the Table is Full In the Dell EMC Networking OS, the table full condition is displayed as CAM full only for LPM. But now the LPM is split into two tables. There are two syslog errors that are displayed: 1. /65 to /128 Table full. 2. 0/0 – 0/64 Table full. A table-full error message is displayed once the number of entries is crossed the table size. Table-full message is generated only once when it crosses the threshold.
DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#01:13:44: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from DellEMC# 2. Display the hardware forwarding table mode in the current boot and in the next boot.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 28. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • Configure Control Plane Policing Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list extended lacp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#permit lacp DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
1. Create a QoS input policy for the router and assign the policing. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input name cpu-qos 2. Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name 3. Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4. Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode.
Table 15.
Displaying CoPP Configuration The CLI provides show commands to display the protocol traffic assigned to each control-plane queue and the current rate-limit applied to each queue. Other show commands display statistical information for trouble shooting CoPP operation. To view the rates for each queue, use the show cpu-queue rate cp command.
Example of Viewing Queue Mapping for IPv6 Protocols DellEMC#show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping Protocol Src-Port Dst-Port TcpFlag Queue EgPort Rate (kbps) --------------- -------- ------- ----- ------ ----------TCP (BGP) any/179 179/any _ Q6 CP _ ICMP any any _ Q6 CP _ VRRP any any _ Q7 CP _ DellEMC# 240 Control Plane Policing (CoPP)
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
Data center bridging satisfies the needs of the following types of data center traffic in a unified fabric: Traffic Description LAN traffic LAN traffic consists of many flows that are insensitive to latency requirements, while certain applications, such as streaming video, are more sensitive to latency. Ethernet functions as a best-effort network that may drop packets in the case of network congestion.
The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: ● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. ● iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: ● PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only four lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic.
Figure 30. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 16. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group.. Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group.
Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 31. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE.
DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map, apply the configured DCB map to a port, configure PFC without a DCB map, and configure lossless queues. DCB Map: Configuration Procedure A DCB map consists of PFC and ETS parameters. By default, PFC is not enabled on any 802.1p priority and ETS allocates equal bandwidth to each priority. To configure user-defined PFC and ETS settings, you must create a DCB map.
PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities. ETS: Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure PFC and ETS parameters on an interface, you must specify the PFC mode, the ETS bandwidth allocation for a priority group, and the 802.1p priority-to-priority group mapping in a DCB map. No default PFC and ETS settings are applied to Ethernet interfaces.
Port A —> Port B Port C —> Port B PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues.
NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: By default, no lossless queues are configured on a port. A limit of two lossless queues is supported on a port. If the amount of priority traffic that you configure to be paused exceeds the two lossless queues, an error message displays. In S6000, any pfc-dot1p priorities configured on a given interface need not be the same across the system. In other words, lossless queue limit is applicable on a per-port level and not on the global-config context.
● When you apply a DCB map, an error message is displayed if link-level flow control is already enabled on an interface. You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface. ● In a switch stack, configure all stacked ports with the same PFC configuration. ● Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to change the default dot1p priority-queue assignments only if the change satisfies the following requirements in DCB maps already applied to the interfaces: ● All 802.
Configuring no-drop queues is applicable only on the interfaces which do not need PFC. Example: Port A —> Port B Port C —> Port B PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit.
Table 18. Configuring Lossless Queues on a Port Interface (continued) Step Task Command Command Mode Range: 0-3. Separate queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example: pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3 Default: No lossless queues are configured.
Behavior of Tagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting. All other Priorities for which PFC is not enabled are mapped to default PG – PG7. Classification rules on ingress (Ingress FP CAM region) matches incoming packet-dot1p and assigns an internal priority (to select queue as per Table 1 and Table 2).
Table 19. Queue Assignments Internal-priority Queue 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 3. Dot1p->Queue Mapping Configuration is retained at the default value. Default dot1p-queue mapping is, DellEMC#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Queue : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 7 4. Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a. Enable DCB globally. DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable b. Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
dellNetFpStatsPe This table fetches the Allocated Min cells, Shared cells, and Headroom cells per Priority Group, the mode rPgTable in which the buffer cells are allocated — Static or Dynamic and the Used Min Cells, Shared cells and Headroom cells per Priority Group. The table fetches a value of 0 if the mode of allocation is Static and a value of 1 if the mode of allocation is Dynamic. This table lists thestack-unit number, port number and priority group number.
Table 21. Dot1p to Queue Mapping Packet-Dot1p Queue 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB policies on an interface. Using PFC to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic To use PFC for managing converged Ethernet traffic, use the following command: dcb-map stack-unit all dcb-map-name Operations on Untagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets.
Generation of PFC for a Priority for Untagged Packets In order to generate PFC for a particular priority for untagged packets, and configuring PFC for that priority, you should find the queue number associated with priority from TABLE 1 and Associate a DCB map to forward the matched DSCP packet to that queue. PFC frames gets generated with PFC priority associated with the queue when the queue gets congested.
PRIORITY-GROUP mode exit 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to configure all remaining dot1p priorities in an ETS priority group. 6. Specify the dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping for each priority. priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...dot1p7_group_num Priority group range is from 0 to 7. All priorities that map to the same queue must be in the same priority group. Leave a space between each priority group number.
1. Create a QoS output policy. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#qos-policy-output test12 The maximum 32 alphanumeric characters. 2. Configure the percentage of bandwidth to allocate to the dot1p priority/queue traffic in the associated L2 class map. QoS OUTPUT POLICY mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)#bandwidth-percentage 100 The default is none. 3. Repeat Step 2 to configure bandwidth percentages for other priority queues on the port. QoS OUTPUT POLICY mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)#bandwidth-percentage 100 4.
● Scheduling of priority traffic: dot1p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled to the current queue mapping. dot1p priorities within the same queue must have the same traffic properties and scheduling method.
● If priority group 1 or 2 has free bandwidth, (20 + 30)% of the free bandwidth is distributed to priority group 3. Priority groups 1 and 2 retain whatever free bandwidth remains up to the (20+ 30)%. Strict-priority groups: If two priority groups have strict-priority scheduling, traffic assigned from the priority group with the higher priority-queue number is scheduled first.
DCBx Port Roles To enable the auto-configuration of DCBx-enabled ports and propagate DCB configurations learned from peer DCBx devices internally to other switch ports, use the following DCBx port roles. Auto-upstream The port advertises its own configuration to DCBx peers and is willing to receive peer configuration. The port also propagates its configuration to other ports on the switch. The first auto-upstream that is capable of receiving a peer configuration is elected as the configuration source.
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: ● The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. ● On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: ○ If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch. ● If a configuration source is found, the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source.
Figure 32. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: ● For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
4. Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} ● auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from autoupstream ports. ● auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
● ieee-v2.5: configures a port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. NOTE: To configure the DCBx port role the interfaces use to exchange DCB information, use the DCBx port-role command in INTERFACE Configuration mode (Step 3). 4. Configure the PFC and ETS TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Table 22. Displaying DCB Configurations (continued) Command Output show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] Displays the data center bridging status, number of PFCenabled ports, and number of PFC-enabled queues. On the master switch in a stack, you can specify a stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group.
PG:0 TSA:ETS BW:50 PFC:OFF Priorities:0 1 2 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS BW:50 Priorities:3 4 PFC:ON The following example shows the show interfaces pfc summary command.
Table 23. show interface pfc summary Command Description (continued) Fields Description DCBx exchange (Willing bit received in PFC TLV): enabled or disabled. Local is enabled DCBx operational status (enabled or disabled) with a list of the configured PFC priorities Operational status (local port) DCBx operational status (enabled or disabled) with a list of the configured PFC priorities.
Te Te Te Te Te 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following example shows the show interface ets summary command.
3 4 5 6 7 Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic
Table 24. show interface ets detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including Admin mode (enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer), priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: ● Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with peer. ● Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from peer.
6 7 8 - - Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (IEEE).
DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBx Status: ---------------DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1 Total DCBx Frames transmitted 994 Total DCBx Frames received 646 Total DCBx Frame errors 0 Total DCBx Frames unrecognized 0 The following table describes the show interface DCBx detail command fields. Table 25.
Table 25. show interface DCBx detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Total DCBx Frames transmitted Number of DCBx frames sent from local port. Total DCBx Frames received Number of DCBx frames received from remote peer port. Total DCBx Frame errors Number of DCBx frames with errors received. Total DCBx Frames unrecognized Number of unrecognizable DCBx frames received.
dcb enable 2. Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size. A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported. CONFIGURATION mode dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size value dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 3399. Default is 3088. 3. Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is two.
Figure 33. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS DellEMC(conf)# service-class dynamic dot1p Or DellEMC(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)# service-class dynamic dot1p 3.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Assign an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network. When a client joins a network: 1. The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers. This message includes the parameters that the client requires and might include suggested values for those parameters. 2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters.
example, if all pools were configured for a /24 mask, the total would be 40000/253 (approximately 158). If the subnet is increased, more pools can be configured. The maximum subnet that can be configured for a single pool is /17. Dell EMC Networking OS displays an error message for configurations that exceed the allocated memory. ● This platform supports 4000 DHCP Snooping entries. ● All platforms support Dynamic ARP Inspection on 16 VLANs per system. For more information, refer to Dynamic ARP Inspection.
● prefix-length: specifies the number of bits used for the network portion of the address you specify. The prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. 4. Display the current pool configuration. DHCP mode show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address. Dell EMC Networking OS performs a IP + MAC source address validation to ensure that no client can release another clients address.
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1. Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2. Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. ● Display debug information for DHCP server. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. ● Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ● Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode.
address, use the shutdown command on the interface. To display the dynamic IP address and show DHCP as the mode of IP address assignment, use the show interface type slot/port command. To unconfigure the IP address, use the no shutdown command when the lease timer for the dynamic IP address is expired. The interface acquires a new dynamic IP address from the DHCP server. To configure a secondary (backup) IP address on an interface, use the ip address command at the INTERFACE configuration level.
DHCP Client on a Management Interface These conditions apply when you enable a management interface to operate as a DHCP client. ● The management default route is added with the gateway as the router IP address received in the DHCP ACK packet. It is required to send and receive traffic to and from other subnets on the external network. The route is added irrespective when the DHCP client and server are in the same or different subnets.
● An entry in the DHCP snooping table is not added for a DHCP client interface. DHCP Server A switch can operate as a DHCP client and a DHCP server. DHCP client interfaces cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from the DHCP server running on the switch. Acquire a dynamic IP address from another DHCP server. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Do not enable the DHCP client on an interface and set the priority to 255 or assign the same DHCP interface IP address to a VRRP virtual group.
Route Leaking for Complete Routing Table ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 ip route-export 2:2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 Route Leaking for Selective Routes ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 map1 ip route-export 2:2 map2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 ! ! route-map map1 permit 10 match ip address ip1 ! route-map map2 permit 20 match ip address ip2 ! ip prefix-list ip1 seq 5 permit 20.0.0.0/24 <----- This is needed for data forwarding seq 10 permit 20.0.
Global DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration You can configure global DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration using the command {ip | ipv6} dhcp-relay source-interface interface command in the CONFIGURATION mode. DHCP relay uses the IPv4 or IPv6 global source address of the configured interface for relaying packets to the DHCP server.
Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ipv6 address 3::3/128 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# no shutdown 2. Creating L3 interfaces with the DHCP helper configuration. Following are the steps to configure IPv4 or IPv6 interfaces with the DHCP helper configuration. The below example shows two VLAN interfaces (Vlan 2 and 4), DHCP helper (100.0.0.1 and 100::1) for the respective VLANs and the DHCP relay source IPv4 and IPv6 configuration, and two different loopback interfaces (loopback 2 and 3).
● Dynamic ARP Inspection ● Source Address Validation Option 82 RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment. The code for the relay agent information option is 82, and is comprised of two sub-options, circuit ID and remote ID. Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received.
DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping is a feature that protects networks from spoofing. It acts as a firewall between the DHCP server and DHCP clients. DHCP snooping places the ports either in trusted or non-trusted mode. By default, all ports are set to the non-trusted mode. An attacker can not connect to the DHCP server through trusted ports. While configuring DHCP snooping, manually configure ports connected to legitimate servers and relay agents as trusted ports.
2. Specify ports connected to DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode INTERFACE PORT EXTENDER mode ip dhcp snooping trust 3. Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1. Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 dhcp snooping 2. Specify ports connected to IPv6 DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 3.
EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command. ● Display the DHCP snooping information. EXEC Privilege mode show ip dhcp snooping ● Display the contents of the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode show ip dhcp snooping binding View the DHCP snooping statistics with the show ip dhcp snooping command.
The following example shows a sample output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command for a device connected to both the VLT peers. The Po 10 interface is the VLT port channel connected to a ToR switch or an end device. DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.10 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39735 S Vl 200 Po 10 10.1.1.
IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. ● Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping . CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 dhcp snooping verify mac-address Configuring the DHCP secondary-subnet DHCP Secondary subnet feature is an extended feature of DHCP relay agent.
Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic address resolution protocol (ARP) inspection prevents ARP spoofing by forwarding only ARP frames that have been validated against the DHCP binding table. ARP is a stateless protocol that provides no authentication mechanism. Network devices accept ARP requests and replies from any device. ARP replies are accepted even when no request was sent.
Configuring dynamic ARP inspection-limit To configure dynamic ARP inspection rate limit on a port, perform the following task. 1. Enter into global configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2. Select the interface to be configured. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-name 3. Configure ARP packet inspection rate limiting. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} The rate packet per second (pps) range is from 1 to 2048. The default is 15.
to the permissible VLAN. If an attacker is impostering as a legitimate client, the source address appears on the wrong ingress port and the system drops the packet. If the IP address is fake, the address is not on the list of permissible addresses for the port and the packet is dropped. Similarly, if the IP address does not belong to the permissible VLAN, the packet is dropped. To enable IP source address validation, use the following command.
Dell EMC Networking OS creates an ACL entry for each IP+MAC address pair and optionally with its VLAN ID in the binding table and applies it to the interface. To display the IP+MAC ACL for an interface for the entire system, use the show ip dhcp snooping source-addressvalidation [interface] command in EXEC Privilege mode. Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. Topics: • • • • ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Link Bundle Monitoring RTAG7 Flow-based Hashing for ECMP ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system. ● Configure the maximum number of paths per ECMP group. CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indices are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. You can configure ecmp-group with id 2 for link bundle monitoring. This ecmp-group is different from the ecmp-group index 2 that is created by configuring routes and is automatically generated.
Support for moving /128 IPv6 Prefixes and /32 IPv4 Prefixes The software supports a command to program IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table. You can define IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table using the ipv6 unicast-host-routecommand. You can also define IPv4 /32 route prefixes in the host table using the ipv4 unicast-host-routecommand. RTAG7 RTAG7 is a hashing algorithm that load balances the traffic within a trunk group in a controlled manner.
● RTAG7 hashing also provides options to select between multiple hash algorithms that would result in balanced traffic distribution for various traffic patterns.
Figure 36. Before Polarization Effect Router B performs the same hash as router A and all the traffic goes through the same path to router D, while no traffic is redirected to router E. Some of the anti-polarization techniques used generally to mitigate unequal traffic distribution in LAG/ECMP as follows: 1. Configuring different hash-seed values at each node - Hash seed is the primary parameter in hash computations that determine distribution of traffic among the ECMP paths.
bits of xor4 xor8 bits of xor8 xor16 CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 CR16 - 16 bit XOR] Example to view show hash-algorithm: DellEMC(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp flow-based-hashing crc16 DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#show hash-algorithm Hash-Algorithm linecard 0 Port-Set 0 Seed 185270328 Hg-Seed 185282673 EcmpFlowBasedHashingAlgo- crc16 EcmpAlgo- crc32MSB LagAlgo- crc32LSB HgAlgo- crc16 Figure 37.
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
The following table lists the FIP functions. Table 28. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch.
Dynamic ACL generation on the switch operating as a FIP snooping bridge function as follows: Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames.
● To ensure that they are operationally active, check FIP snooping-enabled VLANs. ● Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack FIP snooping supports switch stacking as follows: ● A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit.
○ The existing per-VLAN and FIP snooping configuration is stored. The configuration is re-applied the next time you enable the FIP snooping feature. ● You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature. If you do not apply CAM-ACL space, the following error message is displayed: DellEMC(conf)#feature fip-snooping % Error: Cannot enable fip snooping. CAM Region not allocated for Fcoe.
● A maximum of eight VLANS are supported for FIP snooping on the switch. When enabled globally, FIP snooping processes FIP packets in traffic only from the first eight incoming VLANs. When enabled on a per-VLAN basis, FIP snooping is supported on up to eight VLANs. Configure the FC-MAP Value You can configure the FC-MAP value to be applied globally by the switch on all or individual FCoE VLANs to authorize FCoE traffic.
FIP Snooping Restrictions The following restrictions apply when you configure FIP snooping. ● The maximum number of FCoE VLANs supported on the switch is eight. ● The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. ● The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is twelve.
Table 30. Displaying FIP Snooping Information (continued) Command Output MAC address and FCoE session ID number (FC-ID), worldwide node name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN). show fip-snooping config Displays the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. show fip-snooping enode [enode-mac-address] Displays information on the ENodes in FIP-snooped sessions, including the ENode interface and MAC address, FCF MAC address, VLAN ID and FC-ID.
Table 31. show fip-snooping sessions Command Description (continued) Field Description VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel ID assigned by the FCF. Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port. Port WWNN Worldwide node name of the CNA port. The following example shows the show fip-snooping config command.
Table 33. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description (continued) Field Description FKA_ADV_PERIOD Period of time (in milliseconds) during which FIP keep-alive advertisements are transmitted. No of ENodes Number of ENodes connected to the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan command (VLAN and port).
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of Multicast Discovery Advertisement Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :4451 :2 :2 :0 :16 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 The following table describes the show fip-snooping statistics command fields. Table 34.
Table 34. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions (continued) Field Description Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of VN port session timeouts that occurred on the interface. Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the interface. The following example shows the show fip-snooping system command.
● A server-facing port is configured for DCBx in an auto-downstream role. ● An FCF-facing port is configured for DCBx in an auto-upstream or configuration-source role. The DCBx configuration on the FCF-facing port is detected by the server-facing port and the DCB PFC configuration on both ports is synchronized. For more information about how to configure DCBx and PFC on a port, refer to the Data Center Bridging (DCB) chapter.
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • Flex Hash Capability Overview Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover Optimizing the Boot Time Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview Preserving 802.
Flex hash APIs do not mask out unwanted byte values after extraction of the data from the Layer 4 headers for the offset value. 2. Use the load-balance flexhash command to specify whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subjected to the flex hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
unexpected shutdown) from an older release of Dell EMC Networking OS to Release 9.3(0.0) or later. Dell EMC recommends that you do not downgrade your system from Release 9.3(0.0) to an earlier release that does not support the fast boot functionality because the system behavior is unexpected and undefined. ● Fast boot uses the Symmetric Multiprocessing (SMP) utility that is enabled on the Intel CPU on the device to enhance the speed of the system startup. SMP is supported on the device.
A file is generated to indicate that the system is undergoing a fast boot, which is used after the system comes up. After the Dell EMC Networking OS image is loaded and activated, and the appropriate software components come up, the following additional actions are performed: ● If a database of dynamic ARP entries is present on the flash drive, that information is read and the ARP entries are restored; the entries are installed on the switch as soon as possible.
Unexpected Reload of the System When an unexpected or unplanned reload occurs, such as a reset caused by the software, the system performs the regular boot sequence even if it is configured for fast boot. When the system comes up, dynamic ARP or ND database entries are not present or required to be restored. The system boot up mode will not be fast boot and actions specific to this mode will not be performed.
RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform. RDMA is a technology that a virtual machine (VM) uses to directly transfer information to the memory of another VM, thus enabling VMs to be connected to storage networks. With RoCE, RDMA enables data to be forwarded without passing through the CPU and the main memory path of TCP/IP.
except the Layer 2 and Layer 3 control frames. It is not required for a VLAN ID to be preserved (in the hardware or the OS application) when a VLAN ID, used for encapsulation, is associated with a physical/Port-channel interface. Normal VLANs and VLAN encapsulation can exist simultaneously and any non-unicast traffic received on a normal VLAN is not flooded using lite subinterfaces whose encapsulation VLAN ID matches with that of the normal VLAN ID.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
Figure 41. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. ● The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. ● You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
● If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them. ● Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes. ● Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode. interface primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan id Interface: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 4.
5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. ● Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks ● ● ● ● ● Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 controlvlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address
Figure 42. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M1 to M10) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings. The secondary port P2 is tagged to the control VLAN (V1). VLTi is implicitly tagged to the member VLANs when these VLANs are configured in the VLT peer. As a result of the VLT Node2 configuration on R2, the secondary interface P2 is blocked for the member VLANs (M11 to Mn). Following figure illustrated the FRRP Ring R1 topology: Figure 43.
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 44. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2.
gvrp enable DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. ● Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/21)# Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. ● Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times. To define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message, use this parameter. The Dell EMC Networking OS default is 200ms.
19 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
Figure 45. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. ● Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers. ● To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered.
Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1. Include messages prevents traffic from all other sources in the group from reaching the subnet.
Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
● ● ● ● ● ● Adjusting Timers Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave IGMP Snooping Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. ● View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface ● View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces.
Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. ● View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups show ipv6 mld groups DellEMC# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 225.1.2.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.
second one is the last member query interval (LMQI). The switch waits one LMQI after the second query before removing the group from the state table. ● Adjust the period between queries. INTERFACE mode ip igmp query-interval ● Adjust the time period between queries used to discover IPv6 multicast groups. Interface mode ipv6 mld query-interval ● Adjust the maximum response time.
IGMP Snooping Implementation Information ● IGMP snooping on Dell EMC Networking OS uses IP multicast addresses not MAC addresses. ● IGMP snooping reacts to spanning tree protocol (STP) and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) topology changes by sending a general query on the interface that transitions to the forwarding state. ● If IGMP snooping is enabled on a PIM-enabled VLAN interface, data packets using the router as an Layer 2 hop may be dropped.
Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned (unregistered frame), the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN. When you configure the no ip igmp snooping flood command, the system drops the packets immediately. The system does not forward the frames on mrouter ports, even if they are present. Disable Layer 3 multicast (no ip multicastrouting) in order to disable multicast flooding.
Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
Table 35.
front-panel port IP on the peer box is initiated via management port only, if the management port is UP and management route is available.
● TFTP is an exception to the preceding logic. ● For TFTP, data transfer is initiated on port 69, but the data transfer ports are chosen independently by the sender and receiver during initialization of the connection. The ports are chosen at random according to the parameters of the networking stack, typically from the range of temporary ports. ● If route lookup in EIS routing table succeeds, the application-specific packet count is incremented.
Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch. ● Packets received on the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. ● Packets received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped. ● A separate drop counter is incremented for this case. This counter is viewed using the netstat command, like all other IP layer counters.
This phenomenon occurs where traffic is originating from the switch. 1. Management Applications (Applications that are configured as management applications): The management port is an egress port for management applications. If the management port is down or the destination is not reachable through the management port (next hop ARP is not resolved, and so on), and if the destination is reachable through a data port, then the management application traffic is sent out through the front-end data port.
EIS Behavior: If source TCP or UDP port matches an EIS management or a non-EIS management application and source IP address is management port IP address, management port is the preferred egress port selected based on route lookup in EIS table. If the management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped. If the source TCP/UDP port or source IP address does not match the management port IP address, a route lookup is done in the default routing table.
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell EMC Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
20 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers Splitting 40G Ports without Reload Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics Link Dampening Link Bundle Monitoring Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Port-Pipes Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces View Advanced Interface Information Configuring the Traffic S
The following example shows the configuration and status information for one interface. DellEMC#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-LR. Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 1310nm XFP receive power reading is -3.7685 Interface index is 67436603 Internet address is 65.113.24.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/9 no ip address shutdown Resetting an Interface to its Factory Default State You can reset the configurations applied on an interface to its factory default state. To reset the configuration, perform the following steps: 1. View the configurations applied on an interface. INTERFACE mode show config DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/5)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport rate-interval 8 mac learning-limit 10 no-station-move no shutdown 2.
Physical Interfaces The Management Ethernet interface is a single RJ-45 Fast Ethernet port on a switch. The interface provides dedicated management access to the system. Stack-unit interfaces support Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic over the and 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. These interfaces can also become part of virtual interfaces such as virtual local area networks (VLANs) or port channels. For more information about VLANs, refer to Bulk Configuration.
Overview of Layer Modes On all systems running Dell EMC Networking OS, you can place physical interfaces, port channels, and VLANs in Layer 2 mode or Layer 3 mode. By default, VLANs are in Layer 2 mode. Table 40.
Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode. To enable Layer 3 mode on an individual interface, use the following commands. In all interface types except VLANs, the shutdown command prevents all traffic from passing through the interface. In VLANs, the shutdown command prevents Layer 3 traffic from passing through the interface. Layer 2 traffic is unaffected by the shutdown command.
ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported Automatic recovery of an Err-disabled interface The Dell EMC Networking OS attempts to recover the interface from the Err-disabled state automatically based on the cause of the error.
Whenever the Err-disable recovery timer is reconfigured, it will get effective only after the current timer expires. Following message is displayed after each Err-disable recovery timer configuration: DellEMC(conf)# errdisable recovery interval 30 New timer interval will be effective from the next timer instance only. Following is the sample steps to configure the recovery cause and the timer interval for automatic recovery of an interface.
Management Interfaces The system supports the Management Ethernet interface as well as the standard interface on any port. You can use either method to connect to the system. Configuring Management Interfaces The dedicated Management interface provides management access to the system. You can configure this interface using the CLI, but the configuration options on this interface are limited.
Input 791 packets, 62913 bytes, 775 multicast Received 0 errors, 0 discarded Output 21 packets, 3300 bytes, 20 multicast Output 0 errors, 0 invalid protocol Time since last interface status change: 00:06:03 If there are two RPMs on the system, configure each Management interface with a different IP address. Unless you configure the management route command, you can only access the Management interface from the local LAN.
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is 10.11.131.254 to network 0.0.0.0 Destination ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 C 10.11.130.0/23 DellEMC# Gateway ------via 10.11.131.
● Enter a number as the Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback number The range is from 0 to 16383. ● View Loopback interface configurations. EXEC mode show interface loopback number ● Delete a Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode no interface loopback number Many of the commands supported on physical interfaces are also supported on a Loopback interface. Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface.
Port Channel Implementation Dell EMC Networking OS supports static and dynamic port channels. ● Static — Port channels that are statically configured. ● Dynamic — Port channels that are dynamically configured using the link aggregation control protocol (LACP). For details, see Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The port channel ID ranges from 1 to 4096. As soon as you configure a port channel, Dell EMC Networking OS treats it like a physical interface. For example, IEEE 802.
Creating a Port Channel You can create up to 4096 port channels with up to 16 port members per group on the platform. To configure a port channel, use the following commands. 1. Create a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode.
DellEMC# Te 1/13 (Up) Te 1/14 (Up) The following example shows the port channel’s mode (L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2-port channel assigned to a routed VLAN), the status, and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel. DellEMC>show interface port-channel 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
2. Change to the second port channel INTERFACE mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode interface port-channel id number 3. Add the interface to the second port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface The following example shows moving an interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or no untagged port-channel id number ● Identify which port channels are members of VLANs. EXEC Privilege mode show vlan Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel, perform the following: 1. Configure VLAN membership on individual ports INTERFACE mode DellEMC(conf-if)#vlan tagged 2,3-4 2.
no interface portchannel channel-number ● Disable a port channel. shutdown When you disable a port channel, all interfaces within the port channel are operationally down also. Load Balancing Through Port Channels Dell EMC Networking OS uses hash algorithms for distributing traffic evenly over channel members in a port channel (LAG). The hash algorithm distributes traffic among Equal Cost Multi-path (ECMP) paths and LAG members. The distribution is based on a flow, except for packet-based hashing.
● ● ● ● ● ● lsb — uses the least significant bit of the hash key to compute the egress port. xor1 — uses Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor1 xor2 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor2 xor4 —Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 xor8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 xor16 — uses 16 bit XOR.
Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range. Example of the interface range Command (Single Range) DellEMC(config)# interface range tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 23 DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# no shutdown DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range.
DellEMC(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# no shutdown DellEMC(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
○ For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. The information displays in a continuous run, refreshing every 2 seconds by default. To manage the output, use the following keys.
tdr-cable-test tengigabitethernet slot/port Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2. Displays TDR test results. EXEC Privilege mode show tdr tengigabitethernet slot/port Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers The system supports Dell-qualified transceivers and only some of the non Dell-qualified transceivers.
0,8,16,24,32,36,40,44,48,52,56,60,64,68,72,76,80,84,88,92,100,108,116,124 To display the Fan-out capability profile, use the following show command: show system stack-unit stack-unit number quad-port-profile Example of the show Command The following example shows the show system stack-unit stack-unit number quad-portprofile command.
You can only split the 40G ports in the top row (odd numbered ports) on a 16X40G module. If you configure 4X10G on a 40G interface, the subsequent even numbered interface is removed and unavailable for use.
Important Points to Remember ● Splitting a 40G port into four 10G ports is supported on standalone and stacked units. ● You cannot use split ports as stack-link to stack a system. To verify port splitting, use the show system stack-unit stack-unit-number fanout {count | configure} command. To verify port splitting, use the show system stack-unit stack—unit—number fanout {count | configure} command ● The quad port must be in a default configuration before you can split it into 4x10G ports.
● When you remove the QSA module alone from a 40 Gigabit port, without connecting any SFP or SFP+ cables; Dell Networking OS does not generate any event. However, when you remove a QSA module that has SFP or SFP+ optical cables plugged in, Dell Networking OS generates an SFP or SFP+ Removed event. ● You can use the QSA on any of the ports. Example Scenarios Consider the following scenarios: ● QSFP port 0 is connected to a QSA with SFP+ optical cables plugged in.
SFP 0 Id = 0x0d SFP 0 Ext Id = 0x00 SFP 0 Connector = 0x23 SFP 0 Transceiver Code = 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 SFP 0 Encoding = 0x00 ……………… ……………… SFP 0 Diagnostic Information =================================== SFP 0 Rx Power measurement type = OMA =================================== SFP 0 Temp High Alarm threshold = 0.000C SFP 0 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 0.000V SFP 0 Bias High Alarm threshold = 0.
QSFP 0 Connector = 0x23 QSFP 0 Transceiver Code = 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 QSFP 0 Encoding = 0x00 ……………… ……………… QSFP 0 Diagnostic Information =================================== QSFP 0 Rx Power measurement type = OMA =================================== QSFP 0 Temp High Alarm threshold = 0.000C QSFP 0 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 0.000V QSFP 0 Bias High Alarm threshold = 0.
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/7 gigabitethernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Current address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1GBASE …………………… LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/8 TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Current address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Pluggable media present, QSFP type is 4x10GBASE-CR1-3M …….
penalty exponentially based on the half-time. When the accumulated penalty exceeds a certain threshold (suppress threshold), the interface is put in an Error-Disabled state and for all practical purposes of routing, the interface is deemed to be “down.” After the interface becomes stable and the penalty decays below a certain threshold (reuse threshold), the interface comes up again and the routing protocols re-converge.
Figure 50. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example. During the second interface flap (flap 2), again the penalty (1024) is accumulated.
Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. ● Enable link dampening. INTERFACE mode dampening To view the link dampening configuration on an interface, use the show config command. R1(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.19.1/24 dampening 1 2 3 4 no shutdown To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media. Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 592-9216 = link MTU 576-9398 = IP MTU The IP MTU automatically configures.
The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause frames. To allow fullduplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable reception of frames with destination address equal to this multicast address. The PAUSE frame is defined by IEEE 802.3x and uses MAC Control frames to carry the PAUSE commands. Ethernet pause frames are supported on full duplex only.
The following table lists the various Layer 2 overheads found in Dell EMC Networking OS and the number of bytes. The MTU range is from 592 to 9216, with a default of 9216. IP MTU automatically configures. The following table lists the various Layer 2 overheads found in the Dell EMC Networking OS and the number of bytes. Table 41.
Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1. Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface | stack—unit stack-unit-number] status 2. Determine the remote interface status.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#speed 100 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#duplex full DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#no negotiation auto DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address speed 100 duplex full no shutdown Set Auto-Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master/ forced slave once auto-negotiation is enabled.
View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands for (only) stack-unit interfaces. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations are displayed. Dummy stack-unit interfaces (created with the stack-unit command) are treated like any other physical interface.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#rate-interval 100 DellEMC#show interfaces TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is down, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:01:9e:d9 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h45m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 o
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 3106 packets, 226755 bytes, 0 underruns 133 64-byte pkts, 2973 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 150 seconds): Input 300.
● IP FIB ● L2 ACL ● L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command. This command does not clear the counters any SNMP program captures. To clear the counters, use the following the command. ● Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones. Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Table 42. Standard and Compressed Configurations Uncompressed Compressed ! ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address no ip address switchport switchport shutdown shutdown ! ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Interface group TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 – 4 , TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 no ip address shutdown shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 no ip address shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/34 ip address 2.1.1.
Table 42. Standard and Compressed Configurations (continued) Uncompressed Compressed tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address.
INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] ● ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefixlength format (/24). ● secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
S 6.1.2.11/32 S 6.1.2.12/32 S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
the ipv6 icmp source-interface interface commands in Configuration mode to enable the ICMP error messages to be sent with the source interface IP address. This functionality is supported on loopback, VLAN, port channel, and physical interfaces for IPv4 and IPv6 messages. feature is not supported on tunnel interfaces. ICMP error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported for tunnel interfaces.
● Configuring DNS with Traceroute Name server, Domain name, and Domain list are VRF specific. The maximum number of Name servers and Domain lists per VRF is six. Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands. ● Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup ● Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ...
Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. ● Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup ● Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use.
● ● ● ● Clearing ARP Cache (optional) ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP ARP Learning via ARP Request Configuring ARP Retries Configuring Static ARP Entries ARP dynamically maps the MAC and IP addresses, and while most network host support dynamic mapping, you can configure an ARP entry (called a static ARP) for the ARP cache. To configure a static ARP entry, use the following command. ● Configure an IP address and MAC address mapping for an interface.
○ For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ○ For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. NOTE: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this option with extreme caution. ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Gratuitous ARP can mean an ARP request or reply.
Figure 52. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. ● Set the number of ARP retries.
Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages By default, ICMP unreachable messages are disabled. When enabled, ICMP unreachable messages are created and sent out all interfaces. To disable and re-enable ICMP unreachable messages, use the following commands. ● To disable ICMP unreachable messages. INTERFACE mode no ip unreachable ● Set Dell EMC Networking OS to create and send ICMP unreachable messages on the interface.
it forwards the packet to SW2 and sends an ICMP redirect message to Host H. Host H learns of the new route using the ICMP redirect message and sends all future packets to the remote branch office host to SW2. To enable ICMP or ICMP6 redirect messages, use the icmp6-redirect enable command. NOTE: The icmp6-redirect enable command is applicable for both ICMP and ICMP6 redirects. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS supports redirects on VLAN interfaces.
Configuring a Broadcast Address To configure a broadcast address, use the following command. ● Configure a broadcast address on an interface. ip udp-broadcast-address DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 no shutdown To view the configured broadcast address for an interface, use show interfaces command.
3. Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 54. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface.
Figure 56. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. ● If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. ● If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
● Prefix Renumbering — Useful in transparent renumbering of hosts in the network when an organization changes its service provider. NOTE: As an alternative to stateless autoconfiguration, network hosts can obtain their IPv6 addresses using the dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) servers via stateful auto-configuration. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS).
● A command has been introduced to partition the LPM to support provisioning of IPv6 /65 to /128 route prefixes. To support /65 – /128 IPv6 route prefix entries, Dell EMC Networking OS needs to be programmed with /65 - /128 bit IPv6 support. The number of entries as well needs to be explicitly programmed. This number can be1K, 2K, or 3K granularity. On the system, for IPv6 /65 to /128 will consume the same storage banks which is used by the L3_DEFIP table.
Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities. Routers understand the priority settings and handle them appropriately during conditions of congestion.
Hop Limit (8 bits) The Hop Limit field shows the number of hops remaining for packet processing. In IPv4, this is known as the Time to Live (TTL) field and uses seconds rather than hops. Each time the packet moves through a forwarding router, this field decrements by 1. If a router receives a packet with a Hop Limit of 1, it decrements it to 0 (zero). The router discards the packet and sends an ICMPv6 message back to the sending router indicating that the Hop Limit was exceeded in transit.
11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination. The value is 1 if it can change; the value is 0 if it cannot change.
Implementing IPv6 with Dell EMC Networking OS Dell EMC Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS version in which an IPv6 feature became available for each platform. The sections following the table give greater detail about the feature. Table 43.
Table 43. Dell EMC Networking OS versions and supported platforms with IPv6 support (continued) Feature and Functionality Dell EMC Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S6000 IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 8.3.11 Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 8.3.11 OSPFv3 in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. IPv6 Services and Management Telnet client over IPv6 (outbound Telnet) 8.3.
Path MTU discovery The size of the packet that can be sent across each hop in the network path without being fragmented is called the path maximum transmission unit (PMTU). The PMTU value might differ for the same route between two devices, mainly over a public network, depending on the network load and speed, and it is not a consistent value. The MTU size can also be different for various types of traffic sent from one host to the same endpoint.
Figure 59. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#ipv6 nd dns-server 1000::1 1 Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host To verify that the IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host is configured correctly, use the debug ipv6 nd command in EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host The following example debugs IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host.
ND ND ND IP dns-server address is 1000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds dns-server address is 3000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds dns-server address is 2000::1 with lifetime of 0 seconds unicast RPF check is not supported To display IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show configuration command in INTERFACE CONFIG mode. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show configuration The following example uses the show configuration command to display IPv6 RDNSS information.
cam-acl { ipv6acl } When not selecting the default option, enter all of the profiles listed and a range for each. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. ● Show the current CAM settings. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl ● Provides information on FP groups allocated for the egress acl. CONFIGURATION mode show cam-acl-egress Allocate at least one group for L2ACL and IPv4 ACL. The total number of groups is 4.
Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ○ For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ○ For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ○ For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
rpf DellEMC# RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. ● Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show ipv6 interface interface {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief. ○ For all IPv6 configured interfaces, enter the keyword configured.
○ To display information about all connected IPv6 routes, enter connected. ○ To display information about brief summary of all IPv6 routes, enter summary. ○ To display information about Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes, enter bgp. ○ To display information about ISO IS-IS routes, enter isis. ○ To display information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes, enter ospf. ○ To display information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP), enter rip.
Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ○ For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ○ For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information.
configure terminal 2. Enable the IPv6 RA guard. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard enable 3. Create the policy. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name 4. Define the role of the device attached to the port. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode device-role {host | router} Use the keyword host to set the device role as host. Use the keyword router to set the device role as router. 5. Set the hop count limit.
POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode show config Example of the show config Command DellEMC(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)#show config ! ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test device-role router hop-limit maximum 251 mtu 1350 other-config-flag on reachable-time 540 retrans-timer 101 router-preference maximum medium trusted-port DellEMC(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)# Configuring IPv6 RA Guard on an Interface To configure the IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard on an interface, perform the following steps: 1.
23 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables qualityof-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
message. This cannot be inferred as the maximum supported iSCSI sessions are reached. Also, number of iSCSI sessions displayed on the system may show any number equal to or less than the maximum. The following illustration shows iSCSI optimization between servers and a storage array in which a stack of three switches connect installed servers (iSCSI initiators) to a storage array (iSCSI targets) in a SAN network.
Application of Quality of Service to iSCSI Traffic Flows You can configure iSCSI CoS mode. This mode controls whether CoS (dot1p priority) queue assignment and/or packet marking is performed on iSCSI traffic. When you enable iSCSI CoS mode, the CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic. When you disable iSCSI CoS mode, iSCSI sessions and connections are still detected and displayed in the status tables, but no CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic.
Detection and Auto-Configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays The iSCSI optimization feature includes auto-provisioning support with the ability to detect directly connected Dell EqualLogic storage arrays and automatically reconfigure the switch to enhance storage traffic flows. The switch uses the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) to discover Dell EqualLogic devices on the network. LLDP is enabled by default. For more information about LLDP, refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
● Additional updates to connections (including aging updates) that are learnt on VLT lag members are synced to the peer. ● When receiving an iSCSI login request on a non-VLT interface followed by a response from a VLT interface, the session is not synced since it is initially learnt on a non-VLT interface through the request packet. ● The peer generates a new connection log that sees the login response packet.
Table 44. iSCSI Optimization Defaults (continued) Parameter Default Value iSCSI optimization target ports iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured as default (with no IP address or name) but can be removed as any other configured target. iSCSI session monitoring Disabled. The CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to zero (0). iSCSI Optimization Prerequisites The following are iSCSI optimization prerequisites. ● iSCSI optimization requires LLDP on the switch.
[no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] ● tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests. You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands. The default is 860, 3260. Separate port numbers with a comma. If multiple IP addresses are mapped to a single TCP port, use the no iscsi target port tcp-port-n command to remove all IP addresses assigned to the TCP number.
Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information To display information on iSCSI optimization, use the following show commands. ● Display the currently configured iSCSI settings. show iscsi ● Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. show iscsi sessions ● Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch . To display detailed information on specified iSCSI session, enter the session’s iSCSI ID.
Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort 10.10.0.53 33432 10.10.0.
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Figure 61. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology IS-IS mode.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
● Computes routes to IPv6 destinations. ● Downloads IPv6 routes to the RTM for installing in the FIB. ● Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 45.
In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router. A Level 1-2 router forms Level 1 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 1 router and forms Level 2 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 2 router. NOTE: Even though you enable IS-IS globally, enable the IS-IS process on an interface for the IS-IS process to exchange protocol information and form adjacencies. To configure IS-IS globally, use the following commands.
To view the IS-IS configuration, enter the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. DellEMC#show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: EEEE.EEEE.EEEE IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 47.0004.004d.0001 Routing for area address(es): 21.2223.2425.2627.2829.3031.3233 47.0004.004d.
ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode set-overload-bit 3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode spf-interval [level-l | level-2 | interval] [initial_wait_interval [second_wait_interval]] Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using single-topology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4. Implement a wide metric-style globally.
○ adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. ○ manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary. To change the defaults, use any or all of the following commands. ● Set interval between LSP generation. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-gen-interval [level-1 | level-2] seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 0 to 120.
Table 46. Metric Styles Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow Sends and accepts narrow or old TLVs (Type, Length, Value). 0 to 63 wide Sends and accepts wide or new TLVs. 0 to 16777215 transition Sends both wide (new) and narrow (old) TLVs. 0 to 63 narrow transition Sends narrow (old) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 63 wide transition Sends wide (new) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs.
isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] ○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles. The default is 10. The default level is level-1. For more information about this command, refer to Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style. The following table describes the correct value range for the isis metric command.
LSPID B233.00-00 eljefe.00-00 * eljefe.01-00 * eljefe.02-00 * Force10.00-00 LSP Seq Num 0x00000006 0x0000000D 0x00000001 0x00000001 0x00000004 LSP Checksum 0xC38A 0x51C6 0x68DF 0x2E7F 0xCDA9 LSP Holdtime 1124 1129 1122 1113 1107 ATT/P/OL 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 DellEMC# Controlling Routing Updates To control the source of IS-IS route information, use the following command. ● Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving IS-IS routing information.
○ static: for user-configured routes. ○ bgp: for BGP routes only. ● Deny RTM download for pre-existing redistributed IPv4 routes. ROUTER ISIS mode distribute-list redistributed-override in Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. ● Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
Configure the following parameters: ○ level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. ○ metric-value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. ○ metric-type: choose either external or internal. The default is internal. ○ map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. ● Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.
Configuring Authentication Passwords You can assign an authentication password for routers in Level 1 and for routers in Level 2. Because Level 1 and Level 2 routers do not communicate with each other, you can assign different passwords for Level 1 routers and for Level 2 routers. However, if you want the routers in the level to communicate with each other, configure them with the same password. To configure a simple text password, use the following commands. ● Configure authentication password for an area.
Debugging IS-IS To debug IS-IS processes, use the following commands. ● View all IS-IS information. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis ● View information on all adjacency-related activity (for example, hello packets that are sent and received). EXEC Privilege mode debug isis adj-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: ○ interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only.
Configure Metric Values For any level (Level-1, Level-2, or Level-1-2), the value range possible in the isis metric command in INTERFACE mode changes depending on the metric style. The following describes the correct value range for the isis metric command.
Table 47.
Table 49.
Figure 62. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.1/24 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ip router isis ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
25 In-Service Software Upgrade This chapter deals with In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) and its dependencies. Topics: • • • • • • • • • ISSU Introduction Fastboot 2.0 (Zero Loss Upgrade) L2 ISSU L3 ISSU CoPP Mirroring flow control packets PFC QoS Tunnel Configuration ISSU Introduction In-service software upgrades (ISSU), also known as warmboot or fastboot 2.0, allow Dell EMC Networking to address software bugs and add new features to switches and routers without interrupting network availability.
L2 ISSU This section deals with L2 ISSU related information. The following changes are required by ISSU for L2: LACP Long Timeout If there is a LACP protocol running on an interface, the user needs to have the LACP long timeout configured, if LACP short timeout is configured, ISSU will not take place. Spanning Tree When spanning tree is enabled, user needs to have BPDU guard configured in the interfaces.
The user will need to configure the boot-type to warmboot under the reload-type configuration mode. Warmboot is a system reload technique where the NPU will not restart. Only the CPU is restarted to bring up the upgraded software. Software upgrade ISSU, is the typical use case for warmboot. Since BCM chip is already up and running while the software is restarted, there should not be any traffic outage during warmboot.
26 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
● You can configure link dampening on individual members of a LAG. LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. ● Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. ● Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode switchport DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 32 DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#switchport The LAG is in the default VLAN. To place the LAG into a non-default VLAN, use the tagged command on the LAG.
NOTE: The 30-second timeout is available for dynamic LAG interfaces only. You can enter the lacp long-timeout command for static LAGs, but it has no effect. To configure LACP long timeout, use the following command. ● Set the LACP timeout value to 30 seconds.
Figure 63. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell EMC Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group.
Figure 64. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking The following are shared LAG state tracking console messages: ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 1 ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 To view the status of a failover group member, use the show interface port-channel command.
LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 65. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 136 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#end ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address ! port-ch
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
27 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Topics: • • • • • Manage the MAC Address Table MAC Learning Limit NIC Teaming Configure Redundant Pairs Far-End Failure Detection Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. ● Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. ● Display the contents of the MAC address table.
Setting the MAC Learning Limit To set a MAC learning limit on an interface, use the following command. ● Specify the number of MAC addresses that the system can learn off a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode mac learning-limit address_limit Three options are available with the mac learning-limit command: ○ dynamic ○ no-station-move ○ station-move NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations.
mac learning-limit no-station-move The no-station-move option, also known as “sticky MAC,” provides additional port security by preventing a station move. When you configure this option, the first entry in the table is maintained instead of creating an entry on the new interface. no-station-move is the default behavior. Entries created before you set this option are not affected. To display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit, use the following command.
● Display a list of all of the interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation. CONFIGURATION mode show mac learning-limit violate-action NOTE: When the MAC learning limit (MLL) is configured as no-station-move, the MLL will be processed as static entries internally. For static entries, the MAC address will be installed in all port-pipes, irrespective of the VLAN membership.
mac port-security NIC Teaming NIC teaming is a feature that allows multiple network interface cards in a server to be represented by one MAC address and one IP address in order to provide transparent redundancy, balancing, and to fully utilize network adapter resources. The following illustration shows a topology where two NICs have been teamed together. In this case, if the primary NIC fails, traffic switches to the secondary NIC because they are represented by the same set of addresses. Figure 72.
Figure 73. Configuring the mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Command Configure Redundant Pairs Networks that employ switches that do not support the spanning tree protocol (STP) — for example, networks with digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAM) — cannot have redundant links between switches because they create switching loops (as shown in the following illustration).
Figure 74. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
As shown in the above illustration, interface 3/41 is a backup interface for 3/42, and 3/42 is in the Down state. If 3/41 fails, 3/42 transitions to the Up state, which makes the backup link active. A message similar to the following message appears whenever you configure a backup port.
Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Te 1/2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol that senses remote data link errors in a network. FEFD responds by sending a unidirectional report that triggers an echoed response after a specified time interval. You can enable FEFD globally or locally on an interface basis.
3. When the local interface receives the echoed packet from the remote end, the local interface transitions to the Bi-directional state. 4. If the FEFD enabled system is configured to use FEFD in Normal mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, (you can set each interval can be set between 3 and 300 seconds) the state changes to unknown. 5.
fefd-global {interval | mode} To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show fefd FEFD is globally 'ON', interval is 3 seconds, mode is 'Normal'.
Debugging FEFD To debug FEFD, use the first command. To provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection, use the second command. ● Display output whenever events occur that initiate or disrupt an FEFD enabled connection. EXEC Privilege mode debug fefd events ● Provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection.
28 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 802.
Figure 76. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Segment TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU) (shown in the following table), which is transmitted from one LLDP-enabled device to its LLDP-enabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs. All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
Optional TLVs The Dell EMC Networking OS supports these optional TLVs: management TLVs, IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs, and TIA-1057 organizationally specific TLVs. Management TLVs A management TLV is an optional TLVs sub-type. This kind of TLV contains essential management information about the sender. Organizationally Specific TLVs A professional organization or a vendor can define organizationally specific TLVs.
Table 52. Optional TLV Types (continued) Type TLV Description port belongs (and the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs if the port is in Hybrid mode). 127 Protocol Identity Indicates the protocols that the port can process. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate, and whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation.
TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell EMC Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4). Network connectivity devices are responsible for: ● transmitting an LLDP-MED capability TLV to endpoint devices ● storing the information that endpoint devices advertise The following table describes the five types of TIA-1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs. Table 53.
Table 53. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs (continued) Type SubType TLV Description 127 11 Inventory — Asset ID Indicates a user specified device number to manage inventory. 127 12–255 Reserved — LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV.
LLDP-MED Network Policies TLV A network policy in the context of LLDP-MED is a device’s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations. LLDP-MED network policies TLV include: ● VLAN ID ● VLAN tagged or untagged status ● Layer 2 priority ● DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined.
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. ● Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell EMC Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
● 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. ● Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2. Enter LLDP management-interface mode. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode management-interface 3. Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP on Management Ports To disable or undo LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ location-identification power-via-mdi softphone-voice streaming-video video-conferencing video-signaling voice voice-signaling In the following example, LLDP is enabled globally. R1 and R2 are transmitting periodic LLDPDUs that contain management, 802.1, and 802.3 TLVs. Figure 82. Configuring LLDP Storing and Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs Dell EMC Networking OS provides support to store unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) LLDP TLVs.
NOTE: The system increments the TLV discard counter and does not store unrecognized LLDP TLV information in following scenarios: ● If there are multiple TLVs with the same information is received ● If DCBX is down on the receiving interface The organizational specific TLV list is limited to store 256 entries per neighbor. If TLV entries are more than 256, then the oldest entry (of that neighbor) in the list is replaced.
Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Neighbors To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the following commands. ● Display brief information about adjacent devices. show lldp neighbors ● Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
( 19, 4) ( 20, 4) ( 21, 4) ( 22, 4) ( 23, 4) ( 24, 4) ( 25, 4) ( 29, 4) ( 30, 4) ( 31, 4) ( 32, 4) ( 33, 4) ( 34, 4) ( 35, 4) ( 39, 4) ( 40, 4) ( 41, 4) ( 42, 4) ( 43, 4) ( 44, 4) ( 45, 4) ( 49, 4) ( 50, 4) ( 51, 4) ( 52, 4) ( 53, 4) ( 54, 4) ( 55, 4) ( 59, 4) ( 60, 4) ( 61, 4) ( 62, 4) ( 63, 4) ( 64, 4) ( 65, 4) ( 69, 4) ( 70, 4) ( 71, 4) ( 72, 4) ( 73, 4) ( 74, 4) ( 75, 4) ( 79, 4) ( 80, 4) ( 81, 4) ( 82, 4) ( 83, 4) ( 84, 4) ( 85, 4) ( 89, 4) ( 90, 4) ( 91, 4) ( 92, 4) ( 93, 4) ( 94, 4) ( 95, 4) ( 99, 4)
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode hello R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#hello ? <5-180> Hello interval in seconds (default=30) R1(conf-lldp)#hello 25 R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise managemen
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode no mode R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities
R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. ● View a readable version of the TLVs.
Dec 4 22:38:28 : 00:a0:c9:00:00:01 Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: Chassis ID, Len: 7, Subtype: Mac address (4) Value: TLV: Port ID, Len: 2, Subtype: Interface name (5) Value: T TLV: TTL, Len: 2, Value: 300 TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, ORG_SPEC[aa-bb-cc, 4], Len: 1, Value:a aa bb cc 04 61 40 TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, Type: 125 Len: 1, Value: @ TLV: ENDOFPDU, Len: 0 Relevant Management Objects Dell EMC Networking OS supports all IEEE
Table 58.
Table 59. LLDP 802.
Table 60.
29 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: ● The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN. When a large volume of traffic is processed, the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way. This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software. ● The ip vlan-flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs.
There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries. Enabling a Switch for Multicast NLB To enable a switch for Multicast NLB mode, perform the following steps: 1.
30 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 85.
Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
CONFIGURATION mode clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | local | rejected-sa] Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error. ● Cache rejected sources.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. ● Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. DellEMC(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1.
Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa 2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2.
GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1 Expire 70 UpTime 00:27:20 Expire 1 UpTime 00:10:29 [Router 3] R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3(conf)# To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode.
clear ip msdp peer peer-address R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.
1. All the RPs serving a given group are configured with an identical anycast address. 2. Sources then register with the topologically closest RP. 3. RPs use MSDP to peer with each other using a unique address. Figure 93. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2.
ip msdp peer 5. Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP. When multiple RPs exist within a domain, the RPs forward received active source information back to the originating RP, which violates the RFP rule. You can prevent this unnecessary flooding by creating a mesh-group.
ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 The following example shows an R2 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.2 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 MSDP Sample Configuration: R4 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/22 ip address 10.10.42.
31 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• • • • • • • Modifying Global Parameters Modifying the Interface Parameters Setting STP path cost as constant Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 61. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .
● Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes ● Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. ● Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled.
MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping. To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode.
To view the bridge priority, use the show config command from PROTOCOL MSTP mode. R3(conf-mstp)#msti 2 bridge-priority 0 1d2h51m: %RPM0-P:RP2 %SPANMGR-5-STP_ROOT_CHANGE: MSTP root changed for instance 2. My Bridge ID: 0:0001.e809.c24a Old Root: 32768:0001.e806.953e New Root: 0:0001.e809.c24a R3(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 MSTI 2 bridge-priority 0 Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one MSTP region.
● Max-age — the length of time the bridge maintains configuration information before it refreshes that information by recomputing the MST topology. ● Max-hops — the maximum number of hops a BPDU can travel before a receiving switch discards it. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change MSTP parameters. Poorly planned modification of MSTP parameters can negatively affect network performance.
Table 62.
Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode, an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states. The bpduguard shutdown-on-violation option causes the interface hardware to be shut down when it receives a BPDU.
Figure 95. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown SFTOS Example Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3.
Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. ● Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu ● Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages. debug spanning-tree mstp events To ensure all the necessary parameters match (region name, region version, and VLAN to instance mapping), examine your individual routers. To show various portions of the MSTP configuration, use the show spanning-tree mst commands.
Name: Tahiti, Rev: 123 (MSTP region name and revision), Int Root Path Cost: 0 Rem Hops: 19, Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e8d5.cbbd 4w0d4h : INST 1 (MSTP Instance): Flags: 0x78, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Int Root Cost: 0 Brg/Port Prio: 32768/128, Rem Hops: 19 INST 2 (MSTP Instance): Flags: 0x78, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e806.
32 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d ● ● ● ● The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast traffic can be forwarded to a maximum of 15 VLANs with the same outgoing interface.
● Limit the total number of multicast routes on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 96. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 63. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 63. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
multicast traffic flows only from the RP to the receivers. Once a receiver receives traffic from the RP, PM-SM switches to SPT to forward multicast traffic, which connects the receiver directly to the source. You can configure PIM to switch over to the SPT when the router receives multicast packets at or beyond a specified rate. Table 64.
Figure 97. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 65. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 65. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Understanding Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) is a multicast diagnostic facility used for tracing multicast paths. Mtrace enables you to trace the path that a multicast packet takes from its source to the destination. When you initiate mtrace from a source to a destination, an mtrace Query packet with IGMP type 0x1F is sent to the last-hop multicast router for the given destination. The mtrace query packet is forwarded hop-by-hop untill it reaches the last-hop router.
● MTRACE Transit — when a Dell EMC Networking system is an intermediate router between the source and destination in an MTRACE query, Dell EMC Networking OS computes the RPF neighbor for the source, fills in the request, and forwards the request to the RPF neighbor. When a Dell EMC Networking system is the last hop to the destination, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a response to the query. To print the network path, use the following command.
Table 66. mtrace Command Output — Explained (continued) Command Output Description From source (?) to destination (?) In case the provided source or destination IP can be resolved to a hostname the corresponding name will be displayed. In cases where the IP cannot be resolved, it is displayed as (?) 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination The first row in the table corresponds to the destination provided by the user. -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.
Table 67. Supported Error Codes (continued) Error Code Error Name Description 0x81 NO_SPACE There is not enough room to insert another response data block in the packet. mtrace Scenarios This section describes various scenarios that may result when an mtrace command is issued. The following table describes various scenarios when the mtrace command is issued: Table 68.
Table 68. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario You invoke a weak mtrace request by specifying only the source without specifying the mulicast tree or multicast group information for the source. Mtrace traces a path towards the source by using the RPF neighbor at each node. Output R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.
Table 68. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario When you issue the mtrace command with the source and multicast group information, if a multicast route is not present on a particular node, then the NO ROUTE error code is displayed on the node. In this scenario, the Source Network/Mask column for that particular node displays the the value as default.
Table 68. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output ----------------------------------------------------------------- If the destination provided in the command is not a valid receiver for the multicast group, the last hop router for the destination provides the WRONG LAST HOP error code. If the last-hop router contains a path to the source, the path is traced irrespective of the incorrect destination.
Table 68. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------Timed out receiving responses Perhaps no local router has a route for source, the receiver is not a member of the multicast group or the multicast ttl is too low. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Table 68. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output Querying reverse path for source 6.6.6.6 to destination 4.4.4.5 via RPF From source (?) to destination (?) ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM RPF Interface 6.6.6.
33 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 98. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: ● UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. ● A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
A tracked route matches a route in the routing table only if the exact address and prefix length match an entry in the routing table. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
VRRP Object Tracking As a client, VRRP can track up to 20 objects (including route entries, and Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces) in addition to the 12 tracked interfaces supported for each VRRP group. You can assign a unique priority-cost value from 1 to 254 to each tracked VRRP object or group interface. The priority cost is subtracted from the VRRP group priority if a tracked VRRP object is in a DOWN state.
show track object-id DellEMC(conf)#track 100 interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 line-protocol DellEMC(conf-track-100)#delay up 20 DellEMC(conf-track-100)#description San Jose data center DellEMC(conf-track-100)#end DellEMC#show track 100 Track 100 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 line-protocol Description: San Jose data center Tracking a Layer 3 Interface You can create an object that tracks the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 Layer 3 interface.
DellEMC(conf-track-101)#description NYC metro DellEMC(conf-track-101)#end DellEMC#show track 101 Track 101 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/2 ip routing Description: NYC metro The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv6 interface: DellEMC(conf)#track 103 interface tengigabitethernet 1/11 ipv6 routing DellEMC(conf-track-103)#description Austin access point DellEMC(conf-track-103)#end DellEMC#show track 103 Track 103 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin a
○ The resolution value used to map RIP routes is not configurable. The RIP hop-count is automatically multiplied by 16 to scale it. For example, a RIP metric of 16 (unreachable) scales to 256, which considers a route to be DOWN. Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1. Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route.
Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Configuring track reachability refresh interval If there is no entry in ARP table or if the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is made to check if the next-hop address is reachable after a certain refresh interval to see if the next-hop address appear in the ARP cache before considering it as DOWN.
4. (Optional) Identify the tracked object with a text description. OBJECT TRACKING mode description text The text string can be up to 80 characters. 5. (Optional) Configure the metric threshold for the UP and/or DOWN routing status to be tracked for the specified route. OBJECT TRACKING mode threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255.
Track 2 IPv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold Metric threshold is Up (STATIC/0/0) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 Metric threshold down 255 up 254 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 ip routing IP routing is
34 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Figure 99. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
● Type 3: Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Prefix LSA (OSPFv3) — An ABR takes information it has learned on one of its attached areas and can summarize it before sending it out on other areas it is connected to. The link-state ID of the Type 3 LSA is the destination network number. ● Type 4: AS Border Router Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Router LSA (OSPFv3) — In some cases, Type 5 External LSAs are flooded to areas where the detailed next-hop information may not be available.
Figure 101. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
does not necessarily have to interrupt the forwarding of data packets. This behavior is supported because the forwarding tables previously computed by an active RPM have been downloaded into the forwarding information base (FIB) on the line cards (the data plane) and are still resident.
Multi-Process OSPFv2 with VRF Multi-process OSPF with VRF is supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Only one OSPFv2 process per VRF is supported. Multi-process OSPF allows multiple OSPFv2 processes on a single router. Multiple OSPFv2 processes allow for isolating routing domains, supporting multiple route policies and priorities in different domains, and creating smaller domains for easier management. The system supports up to 16 OSPFv2 processes.
RFC 2328 is supported by default on Dell EMC Networking OS and it is indicated in the show ip ospf command output. DellEMC#show ip ospf Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 2.2.2.
Configuration Information The interfaces must be in Layer 3 mode (assigned an IP address) and enabled so that they can send and receive traffic. The OSPF process must know about these interfaces. To make the OSPF process aware of these interfaces, they must be assigned to OSPF areas. You must configure OSPF GLOBALLY on the system in CONFIGURATION mode. NOTE: Loop back routes are not installed in the Route Table Manager (RTM) as non-active routes.
Enabling OSPFv2 To enable Layer 3 routing, assign an IP address to an interface (physical or Loopback). By default, OSPF, similar to all routing protocols, is disabled. You must configure at least one interface for Layer 3 before enabling OSPFv2 globally. If implementing multi-process OSPF, create an equal number of Layer 3 enabled interfaces and OSPF process IDs. For example, if you create four OSPFv2 process IDs, you must have four interfaces with Layer 3 enabled. 1. Assign an IP address to an interface.
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Assigning an OSPFv2 Area After you enable OSPFv2, assign the interface to an OSPF area. Set up OSPF areas and enable OSPFv2 on an interface with the network command. You must have at least one AS area: Area 0. This is the backbone area. If your OSPF network contains more than one area, configure a backbone area (Area ID 0.0.0.0).
Example of Viewing Active Interfaces and Assigned Areas DellEMC>show ip ospf 1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/17 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.2.2.1/24, Area 0.0.0.0 Process ID 1, Router ID 11.1.2.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.2.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
3. Enter ROUTER OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] Process ID is the ID assigned when configuring OSPFv2 globally. 4. Configure the area as a stub area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces. Some interface parameter values must be consistent across all interfaces to avoid routing errors. For example, set the same time interval for the hello packets on all routers in the OSPF network to prevent misconfiguration of OSPF neighbors.
To view interface configurations, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION INTERFACE mode. To view interface status in the OSPF process, use the show ip ospf interface command in EXEC mode. The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration. DellEMC(conf-if)#ip ospf cost 45 DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.2.100 255.255.255.
1. Enable OSPFv2 graceful-restart globally and set the grace period. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart grace-period seconds The seconds range is from 40 and 3000. This setting is the time that an OSPFv2 router’s neighbors advertises it as fully adjacent, regardless of the synchronization state, during a graceful restart. OSPFv2 terminates this process when the grace period ends. 2. Enter the Router ID of the OSPFv2 helper router from which the router does not accept graceful restart assistance.
● Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG- PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny |permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefixlength] The optional parameters are: ○ ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). ○ le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). For configuration information about prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs).
● ● ● ● ● ● ● Have you enabled OSPF globally? Is the OSPF process active on the interface? Are adjacencies established correctly? Are the interfaces configured for Layer 3 correctly? Is the router in the correct area type? Have the routes been included in the OSPF database? Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: ● show interfaces ● show protocols ● debug IP OSPF events and/or packets ● show neighbors ● show routes To
Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology. Figure 102.
no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.
The interfaces must be in IPv6 Layer-3 mode (assigned an IPv6 IP address) and enabled so that they can send and receive traffic. The OSPF process must know about these interfaces. To make the OSPF process aware of these interfaces, assign them to OSPF areas. The OSPFv3 ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on the interface and places the interface in an area.
Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface To assign IPv6 addresses to an interface, use the following commands. 1. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode ipv6 address ipv6 address IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits; separate each group by a colon (:). The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2. Bring up the interface.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. ● Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} vrf {vrf-name} The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. ● Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} ○ number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPFv3 process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process. Route redistribution is also supported between OSPF Routing process IDs. To add redistributing routes, use the following command. ● Specify which routes are redistributed into the OSPF process.
● Enable OSPFv3 graceful restart globally by setting the grace period (in seconds). CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode graceful-restart grace-period seconds The valid values are from 40 to 1800 seconds. ● Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act on the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject ● Specify the operating mode and type of events that trigger a graceful restart.
Type Count/Status Oper Status 1 Admin Status 1 Area Bdr Rtr Status 0 AS Bdr Rtr Status 1 AS Scope LSA Count 0 AS Scope LSA Cksum sum 0 Originate New LSAS 73 Rx New LSAS 114085 Ext LSA Count 0 Rte Max Eq Cost Paths 5 GR grace-period 180 GR mode planned and unplanned Area 0 database summary Type Brd Rtr Count AS Bdr Rtr Count LSA count Summary LSAs Rtr LSA Count Net LSA Count Inter Area Pfx LSA Count Inter Area Rtr LSA Count Group Mem LSA Count Count/Status 2 2 12010 1 4 3 12000 0 0 The following example sh
of security services for both IPv4 and IPv6. Insert the ESP header after the IP header and before the next layer protocol header in Transport mode. It is possible to insert the ESP header between the next layer protocol header and encapsulated IP header in Tunnel mode. However, Tunnel mode is not supported in Dell EMC Networking OS. For detailed information about the IP ESP protocol, refer to RFC 4303.
The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. ● Enable IPsec authentication for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf authentication {null | ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [key-encryption-type] key} ○ ○ ○ ○ null: causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface.
● Remove an IPsec encryption policy from an interface. no ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec spi number ● Remove null encryption on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the encryption policy configured for the OSPFv3 area. no ipv6 ospf encryption null ● Display the configuration of IPsec encryption policies on the router. show crypto ipsec policy ● Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces in encryption policies.
The configuration of IPsec encryption on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area encryption policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. ● Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets in an area.
Outbound ESP SPI Inbound ESP Auth Key Outbound ESP Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key Outbound ESP Cipher Key Transform set : : : : : : 502 (0x1F6) 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH Key Transform set : : : : : : : OSPFv3-1-500 2 50
STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios. NOTE: The following troubleshooting section is meant to be a comprehensive list, but only to provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
MIB Support for OSPFv3 SNMPv3 context name support implements MIB views on multiple OSPV3 instances. Table 69. MIB Objects for OSPFv3 MIB Object OID Description ospfv3GeneralGroup 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.1 Contains a 32-bit unsigned integer uniquely identifying the router in the autonomous system. ospfv3AreaEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.2.1 Contains information describing the parameter configuration and cumulative statistics of the router’s attached areas. ospfv3AsLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.3.
35 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Topics: • • • • Overview Implementing PBR Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing Sample Configuration Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table.
● ● ● ● Destination IP address and mask Source port Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: ● ● ● ● Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell EMC Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers.
● ● ● ● source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address destination ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Destination’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address To delete a rule, use the no redirect command.
multiple seq redirect commands with the same source and destination address and specify a different next-hop IP address. In this way, the recursive routes are used as different forwarding routes for dynamic failover. If the primary path goes down and the recursive route is removed from the routing table, the seq redirect command is ignored and the next command in the list with a different route is used.
In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are supported on a single interface. Dell EMC Networking OS has the capability to support multiple groups on an interface for backup purposes. Show Redirect List Configuration To view the configuration redirect list configuration, use the following commands. 1. View the redirect list configuration and the associated interfaces. EXEC mode show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name 2.
Example: Showing CAM PBR Configuration DellEMC#show cam pbr stack-unit 1 port-set 0 TCP Flag: Bit 5 - URG, Bit 4 - ACK, Bit 3 - PSH, Bit 2 - RST, Bit 1 - SYN, Bit 0 - FIN Cam Port VlanID Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp Next-hop Egress Index Flag Port Port MAC Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------06080 0 N/A IP 0x0 0 0 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 199.199.199.199 N/A NA 06081 0 N/A TCP 0x10 0 40 234.234.234.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
144.144.144.144 DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#end Verify the Status of the Track Objects (Up/Down): DellEMC#show track brief ResId 1 2 3 4 Resource Interface ip routing Interface ipv6 routing IP Host reachability IP Host reachability Parameter Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 42.1.1.2/32 43.1.1.
Create Track Objects to track the Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#track 1 interface tunnel 1 ip routing DellEMC(conf-track-1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#track 2 interface tunnel 2 ipv6 routing DellEMC(conf-track-2)#end Verify the Status of the Track Objects (Up/Down): DellEMC#show track brief ResId Resource 1 Interface ip routing 2 Interface ipv6 routing DellEMC# Parameter Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 State Up Up LastChange 00:00:00 00:00:00 Create a Redirect-list with Track Objects pertaining
36 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action. If a router between the host and the RP receives a PIM Join message for which it already has a (*,G) entry, the interface on which the message was received is added to the outgoing interface list associated with the (*,G) entry, and the message is not (and does not need to be) forwarded towards the RP.
Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. ● ● ● ● Configuring S,G Expiry Timers Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point Configuring a Designated Router Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1. Enable IPv4 multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] 2. Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
127.87.50.5 DellEMC# Te 2/13 00:03:08/00:01:37 v2 1 / S DellEMC#show ipv6 pim neighbor Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Address fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f Te 1/11 01:44:59/00:01:16 fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Te 1/12 01:45:00/00:01:16 DellEMC# Ver v2 v2 DR Prio/Mode 1 / S 1 / DR To display the PIM routing table, use the show ip pim tib [group-address [source-address]] command from EXEC privilege mode.
ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds The range is from 211 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 210. NOTE: The global expiry time for all [S, G] entries can vary from 360 to 420 seconds. Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. ● Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface.
INTERFACE mode ip pim query-interval seconds ● Display the current value of these parameter.
Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet. Create multicast boundaries and domains by filtering inbound and outbound bootstrap router (BSR) messages per interface. The following command is applied to the subsequent inbound and outbound updates.
37 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:36 Member Ports: Te 1/1 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp ssm-map 239.0.0.2 SSM Map Information Group : 239.0.0.2 Source(s) : 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups detail Interface Group Uptime Expires Router mode Last reporter Last reporter mode Last report Group source Source address 10.11.5.2 00:00:01 Expires Never Last Reporter 10.11.3.2 Vlan 300 239.0.0.2 00:00:01 Never IGMPv2-Compat 10.11.3.
CONFIGURATION ip pim bsr-candidate ipv6 pim bsr-candidate 2. Enter the following IPv4 or IPv6 command to make a PIM router a RP candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim rp-candidate ipv6 pim rp-candidate 3. Display IPv4 or IPv6 Bootstrap Router information. EXEC Privilege show ip pim bsr-router Example: DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.
38 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session. The platform supports multiple source-destination statements in a single monitor session.
Example of Configuring Another Monitoring Session with a Previously Used Destination Port DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 300 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-300)#source TenGig 1/17 destination TenGig 1/4 direction tx % Error: Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe.
in the configuration source TenGig 6/1 destination TeGig 6/2 direction tx, if the MD port TenGig 6/1 is an untagged member of any VLAN, all monitored frames that the MG port TeGig 6/2 receives are tagged with the VLAN ID of the MD port. Similarly, if BPDUs are transmitted, the MG port receives them tagged with the VLAN ID 4095. This behavior might result in a difference between the number of egress packets on the MD port and monitored packets on the MG port.
N/A N/A N/A 0 0 1 Te 1/1 N/A Po 10 N/A Vl 40 N/A Te 1/2 No Te 1/2 No Te 1/3 No rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No rx Flow 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring. Please refer section Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring. In the following example, the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1/1.
Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only the specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. It is available for Layer 3 ingress and known unicast egress traffic. You can specify the traffic that needs to be monitored using standard or extended access-lists. The flow-based monitoring mechanism copies packets that matches the ACL rules applied on the port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port.
------ ------------------ ------- ------ -------------- --------1 Te 1/2 remote-ip rx Port 0 No N/A N/A yes DellEMC# --------0.0.0.0 -------0.0.0.0 0 The show config command has been modified to display monitoring configuration in a particular session. Example Output of the show Command The show ip accounting commands have been enhanced to display whether monitoring is enabled for traffic that matches with the rules of the specific ACL.
To view an access-list that you applied to an interface, use the show ip accounting access-list command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 0 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#flow-based enable DellEMC(conf)#ip access-list ext testflow DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 5 permit icmp any any count bytes monitor DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
Configuring IPv6 Flow-Based Mirroring This section describes how to configure IPv6 flow-based mirroring in the monitor session. You can configure IPv6 flow-based mirroring under monitor session. The IPv6 flow-based mirroring is supported in SPAN, RSPAN, and ERSPAN monitor sessions. By default, all mirror ACLs is considered as implicit permit. . The Dell EMC Networking OS creates a new dedicated CAM region ipv6mirracl for IPv6 mirror ACL, which does not have any impact on IPv6 user ACL.
The following is sample running-configuration of IPv6 flow-based mirroring with ACLs applied to monitor sessions.
Remote Port Mirroring Example Remote port mirroring uses the analyzers shown in the aggregation network in Site A. The VLAN traffic on monitored links from the access network is tagged and assigned to a dedicated L2 VLAN. Monitored links are configured in two source sessions shown with orange and green circles. Each source session uses a separate reserved VLAN to transmit mirrored packets (mirrored source-session traffic is shown with an orange or green circle with a blue border).
● You cannot configure a private VLAN or a GVRP VLAN as the reserved RPM VLAN. ● The RPM VLAN can’t be a Private VLAN. ● The RPM VLAN can be used as GVRP VLAN. ● The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN. ● The member port of the reserved VLAN should have MTU and IPMTU value as MAX+4 (to hold the VLAN tag parameter). ● To associate with source session, the reserved VLAN can have at max of only 4 member ports.
● On a source switch on which you configure source ports for remote port mirroring, you can add only one port to the dedicated RPM VLAN which is used to transport mirrored traffic. You can configure multiple ports for the dedicated RPM VLAN on intermediate and destination switches. Displaying Remote-Port Mirroring Configurations To display the current configuration of remote port mirroring for a specified session, enter the show config command in MONITOR SESSION configuration mode.
EXEC mode configure terminal 2. Create a VLAN to transport mirrored traffic in RPM. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 3. Configure the RSPAN VLAN to be used to transport mirrored traffic in RPM. VLAN INTERFACE mode mode remote-port-mirroring 4. Configure a tagged port to carry mirrored traffic in the VLAN. VLAN INTERFACE mode tagged interface You can repeat this command to configure additional tagged ports for the VLAN.
Configuration Example of Remote Port Mirroring This example provides a sample configuration of remote port mirroring (RPM) on a source switch, an intermediate switch, and a destination switch based on the following illustration. Figure 106.
Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an a destination switch.
Configuration Example of RPM for port-channel This example provides a sample configuration of remote port mirroring for the port-channel source interface. Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on source switch The below configuration example shows that the source is a source port-channel and the destination is the reserved VLAN (for example, remote-vlan 30).
● You can configure up to four ERPM source sessions on switch. ● Configure the system MTU to accommodate the increased size of the ERPM mirrored packet. ● The maximum number of source ports you can define in a session is 128. ● The system encapsulates the complete ingress or egress data under GRE header, IP header, and outer MAC header and sends it out at the next hop interface as pointed by the routing table.
SessID Source Destination Dir Protocol FcMonitor Status ------ ------ ----------- -------------- --------- ------0 Te 1/9 remote-ip rx No Enabled 0 Po 1 remote-ip tx No Enabled 1 Vl 11 remote-ip rx No Enabled Mode Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate Gre- ---- --------- -------- ---- --- ---- ---- Port 1.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 0 255 No 100 111 Port 1.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 0 255 No 100 111 Flow 5.1.1.1 3.1.1.
As seen in the above figure, the packets received/transmitted on Port A will be encapsulated with an IP/GRE header plus a new L2 header and sent to the destination ip address (Port D’s ip address) on the sniffer. The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. If the sniffer does not support IP interface, a destination switch will be needed to receive the encapsulated ERPM packet and locally mirror the whole packet to the Sniffer or a Linux Server.
to fail. As a result, Dell EMC Networking OS does not allow local Port mirroring based monitoring to be configured between VLT peers. However, you can create local Port mirroring monitoring sessions separately on individual devices that are a part of the VLT configuration. NOTE: For more information on configuring VLT, see Configuring VLT on page 951.
Table 71. RPM over VLT Scenarios (continued) Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring using Intermediate VLT device No restrictions apply — In this scenario, the VLT device acts as the intermediate device in remote mirroring. The TOR switch contains the source-RPM configurations that enable mirroring of the VLT lag (of the TOR switch) to any orphan port in the VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected through the VLT device, but not directly to the VLT device. None.
39 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Figure 108. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 72. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .
Configure Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus Configuring PVST+ is a four-step process. 1. 2. 3. 4. Configure interfaces for Layer 2. Place the interfaces in VLANs. Enable PVST+. Optionally, for load balancing, select a nondefault bridge-priority for a VLAN.
Influencing PVST+ Root Selection As shown in the previous per-VLAN spanning tree illustration, all VLANs use the same forwarding topology because R2 is elected the root, and all TenGigabitEthernet ports have the same cost. The following per-VLAN spanning tree illustration changes the bridge priority of each bridge so that a different forwarding topology is generated for each VLAN. This behavior demonstrates how you can use PVST+ to achieve load balancing. Figure 109.
Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/32 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. The following tables lists the default values for port cost by interface. Table 73.
CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. EdgePort can cause loops if you enable it on an interface connected to a network. To enable EdgePort on an interface, use the following command. ● Enable EdgePort on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree pvst edge-port [bpduguard | shutdown-on-violation] The EdgePort status of each interface is given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown.
Figure 110. PVST+ with Extend System ID ● Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! inte
40 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 74.
Table 74. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Support for Port-Based, Policy-Based Features (continued) Feature Direction Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 111.
• • • • • • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic. You can configure this feature on physical interfaces and port-channels, but you cannot configure it on individual interfaces in a port channel. You can configure service-class dynamic dot1p from CONFIGURATION mode, which applies the configuration to all interfaces.
Out of profile yellow 0 Traffic Monitor 3: normal Out of profile yellow 0 Traffic Monitor 4: normal Out of profile yellow 0 red 0 NA peak NA red 0 NA peak NA red 0 Configuring Port-Based Rate Shaping Rate shaping buffers, rather than drops, traffic exceeding the specified rate until the buffer is exhausted. If any stream exceeds the configured bandwidth on a continuous basis, it can consume all of the buffer space that is allocated to the port.
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 112. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell EMC Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
class-map match-any 2. Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. NOTE: Within a class-map, the match rules are installed in the sequence number order. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match mac After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.2 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.3 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.5 any seq 10 deny ip any any DellEMC# show cam layer3-qos interface tengigabitethernet 2/4 Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue Index Flag Port Port Marking ----------------------------------------------------------------------20416 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.5/32 0.0.0.
○ x < CIR – will be marked as “Green” ○ CIR < x< PIR – will be marked as “Yellow” ○ PIR < x – will be marked as “Red” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”. Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for input QoS policies are rate policing and setting priority values.
Constraints The systems supporting this feature should use only the default global dot1p to queue mapping configuration as described in Dot1p to Queue Mapping Requirement. Creating an Output QoS Policy To create an output QoS policy, use the following commands. 1. Create an output QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2.
bandwidth-percentage Allocating Memory in the Dynamic Buffer Pool for a Specific Traffic You can restrict any class of traffic from utilizing the available bandwidth to a defined limit. Restricting a traffic to a certain level ensures that when the particular class of traffic uses more than certain bandwidth during congestion, the system drops the traffic. This ensures the latency of the traffic is not affected.
● Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green. ● If you configured a DSCP color map on an interface that does not exist or you delete a DSCP color map that is configured on an interface, that interface uses an all green color policy. To create a DSCP color map: 1. Create the color-aware map QoS DSCP color map. CONFIGURATION mode qos dscp-color-map color-map-name 2.
detail: Displays detailed color policy information on an interface interface : Enter the name of the interface that has the color policy configured. Examples for Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Display summary information about a color policy for one or more interfaces. DellEMC# show Interface TE 1/10 TE 1/11 qos dscp-color-policy summary dscp-color-map mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy for a specific interface.
policy-service-queue qos-polcy Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell EMC Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues Dell EMC Networking OS maps DSCP values. When you configure trust DSCP, the matched packets and matched bytes counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics. Table 77.
trust dot1p Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor dot1p on ingress, you can create service classes based the queueing strategy in Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets. You may apply this queuing strategy globally by entering the following command from CONFIGURATION mode. ● All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally.
Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue To apply an output QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. ● Apply an output QoS policy to queues. INTERFACE mode service-queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. ● Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command.
Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing In strict-priority queuing, the system de-queues all packets from the assigned queue before servicing any other queues. You can assign strict-priority to one unicast queue, using the strict-priority command. ● Policy-based per-queue rate shaping is not supported on the queue configured for strict-priority queuing. To use queuebased rate-shaping as well as strict-priority queuing at the same time on a queue, use the Scheduler Strict feature as described in Scheduler Strict .
Consider that two switches A and B are connected back to back via a tagged interface. Consider the case where untagged packets arrive on switch A, if you want to generate PFC for priority 2 for DSCP range 0-7, then you must need to match the interested traffic using the class map. You should create an L3 Input Qos Policy and mark vlan dot1p as 2. You have to associate both the L3 class map and L3 Input Qos Policy to queue 1 using the policy map.
You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Enabling and Disabling WRED Globally By default, WRED is enabled on the system. You can disable or reenable WRED manually using a single command. Follow these steps to disable or enable WRED in Dell EMC Networking OS. ● Enable WRED CONFIGURATION mode wred enable ● Disable WRED CONFIGURATION mode no wred enable NOTE: If you disable WRED globally, the system accepts any WRED profile you apply to traffic.
EXEC Privilege mode show qos statistics wred-profile DellEMC#show qos statistics wred-profile Interface Te 1/1 Drop-statistic Dropped Pkts Green Yellow Out of Profile 51623 51300 0 DellEMC# Displaying egress–queue Statistics To display the number of transmitted and dropped packets and their rate on the egress queues of an interface, use the following command: ● Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
available. In this case, the system writes as many entries as possible, and then generates an CAM-full error message (shown in the following example). The partial policy-map configuration might cause unintentional system behavior.
In releases of Dell EMC Networking OS earlier than Release 9.3(0.0), you can configure only the maximum shaping attributes, such as the peak rate and the peak burst settings. You can now specify the committed or minimum burst and committed rate attributes. The committed burst and committed rate values can be defined either in bytes or pps. You can use the rate-shape pps peak-rate burst-packets command in the QoS Policy Out Configuration mode to configure the peak rate and burst size as a measure of pps.
Using ECN, the packets are marked for transmission at a later time after the network recovers from the heavy traffic state to an optimal load. In this manner, enhanced performance and throughput are achieved. Also, the devices can respond to congestion before a queue overflows and packets are dropped, enabling improved queue management. When a packet reaches the device with ECN enabled for WRED, the average queue size is computed. To measure the average queue size, a weight factor is used.
Table 79. Scenarios of WRED and ECN Configuration (continued) Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration WRED Threshold Relationship Expected Functionality Q threshold = Q-T, Service pool threshold = SP-T SP-T < Q-T SP based WRED, No ECN marking 1 1 0 X X Queue-based ECN marking above queue threshold. 1 X Q-T < SP-T ECN marking to shared buffer limits of the service-pool and then packets are tail dropped. SP-T < Q-T Same as above but ECN marking starts above SP-T.
Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Keep the following points in mind while configuring the marking and mapping of incoming packets using ECN fields in IPv4 headers: ● Currently Dell EMC Networking OS supports matching only the following TCP flags: ○ ACK ○ FIN ○ SYN ○ PSH ○ RST ○ URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported.
Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded. If you configure ECN for WRED, devices employ this functionality of ECN to mark the packets and reduce the rate of sending packets in a congested, heavily-loaded network.
You can now use the ‘ecn’ match qualifier along with the above TCP flag for classification.
policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Approach with explicit ECN match qualifiers for ECN packets: ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0
Managing Hardware Buffer Statistics The memory management unit (MMU) is 12.2 MB in size. It contains approximately 60,000 cells, each of which is 208 bytes in size. MMU also has another portion of 3 MB allocated to it. The entire MMU space is shared across a maximum of 104 logical ports to support the egress admission-control functionality to implement scheduling and shaping on per-port and per-queue levels.
Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 1 (interface Fo 1/144) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 5 (interface Fo 1/148) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 13 (i
UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 709
41 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Table 80. RIP Defaults Feature Default Interfaces running RIP ● Listen to RIPv1 and RIPv2 ● Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers ● ● ● ● Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
To view the global RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes. DellEMC#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/4 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.
31.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 192.162.2.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:21, Fa 1/49 192.162.2.0/24 auto-summary 192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 1/49 192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes.
Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process. With the redistribute command, you can include open shortest path first (OSPF), static, or directly connected routes in the RIP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands. ● Include directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in RIP.
Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.0.0.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update Distance: (default is 120) DellEMC# To configure an interface to receive or send both versions of RIP, include 1 and 2 in the command syntax.
Summarize Routes Routes in the RIPv2 routing table are summarized by default, thus reducing the size of the routing table and improving routing efficiency in large networks. By default, the autosummary command in ROUTER RIP mode is enabled and summarizes RIP routes up to the classful network boundary. If you must perform routing between discontiguous subnets, disable automatic summarization. With automatic route summarization disabled, subnets are advertised.
The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. DellEMC#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON DellEMC# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2. Core2(conf-router_rip)#end 00:12:24: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Core2#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 7 10.11.30.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.1, 00:00:03, TenGigabitEthernet 2/3 10.300.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 2/4 10.200.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 2/5 10.11.20.
Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.11.20.1 120 00:00:12 Distance: (default is 120) Core2# RIP Configuration on Core3 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core3. Core3(conf)#router rip Core3(conf-router_rip)#version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.1.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.2.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.30.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- --------------------R 10.11.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21 120/1 00:01:14 C 10.11.20.0/24 Direct, Te 3/21 0/0 00:01:53 C 10.11.30.0/24 Direct, Te 3/11 0/0 00:06:00 R 10.200.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21 120/1 00:01:14 R 10.300.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21 120/1 00:01:14 C 192.168.1.0/24 Direct, Te 3/23 0/0 00:06:53 C 192.168.2.
The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 3. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.11.30.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.11.20.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/4 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/5 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
42 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
[no] rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold [value event-number] falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] OR [no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: ○ number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table.
this command. This configuration also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered using the SNMP community string “eventtrap”. DellEMC(conf)#rmon event 1 log trap eventtrap description “High ifOutErrors” owner nms1 Configuring RMON Collection Statistics To enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the RMON collection statistics command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. ● Enable RMON MIB statistics collection.
43 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).
● ● ● ● ● ● Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Influencing RSTP Root Selection Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Important Points to Remember ● RSTP is disabled by default. ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands. 1.
To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Te 3/4 R3# Altr 128.684 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No Adding and Removing Interfaces To add and remove interfaces, use the following commands. To add an interface to the Rapid Spanning Tree topology, configure it for Layer 2 and it is automatically added. If you previously disabled RSTP on the interface using the command no spanning-tree 0 command, re-enable it using the spanning-tree 0 command. ● Remove an interface from the Rapid Spanning Tree topology.
hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell EMC Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. ● Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value ○ priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos.
44 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
45 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
● Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: ○ system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. ○ exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. ○ command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level.
accounting exec execAcct DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting commands 15 com15 DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting exec execAcct Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell EMC Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting. To obtain accounting records displaying information about users currently logged in, use the following command.
Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can assign up to five authentication methods to a method list. Dell EMC Networking OS evaluates the methods in the order in which you enter them in each list. If the first method list does not respond or returns an error, Dell EMC Networking OS applies the next method list until the user either passes or fails the authentication. If the user fails a method list, Dell EMC Networking OS does not apply the next method list.
If you do not set the default list, only the local enable is checked. This setting has the same effect as issuing an aaa authentication enable default enable command. Enabling AAA Authentication — RADIUS To enable authentication from the RADIUS server, and use TACACS as a backup, use the following commands. 1. Enable RADIUS and set up TACACS as backup. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs 2. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host x.x.x.
CONFIGURATION mode aaa reauthentication enable 2. You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate while adding or removing a RADIUS/TACACS+ server. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login method-list-name Example: DellEMC(config)#aaa authentication login vty_auth_list radius Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? 3. You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate whenever there is a change in the RADIUS server list..
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in Dell EMC Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels in Dell EMC Networking OS.
○ Secret:Specify the secret for the user To view username, use the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell EMC Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell EMC Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level.
● level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. ● encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. ● password: enter a string up to 32 characters long. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter. 3. Configure level and commands for a mode or reset a command’s level.
traceroute Trace route to destination DellEMC#confi DellEMC(conf)#? end Exit from Configuration mode exit Exit from Configuration mode no Reset a command snmp-server Modify SNMP parameters DellEMC(conf)# Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines. The user’s privilege level is the same as the privilege level assigned to the terminal line, unless a more specific privilege level is assigned to the user.
Transactions between the RADIUS server and the client are encrypted (the users’ passwords are not sent in plain text). RADIUS uses UDP as the transport protocol between the RADIUS server host and the client. For more information about RADIUS, refer to RFC 2865, Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service.
Privilege Levels Through the RADIUS server, you can configure a privilege level for the user to enter into when they connect to a session. This value is configured on the client system. ● Set a privilege level. privilege level Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
login authentication {method-list-name | default} This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. ● To use the method list. CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
radius-server retransmit retries ○ retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries. ● Configure the time interval the system waits for a RADIUS server host response. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server timeout seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000. Default is 5 seconds. To view the configuration of RADIUS communication parameters, use the show running-config command in EXEC Privilege mode. Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions, use the following command.
Support for Change of Authorization and Disconnect Messages packets The Network Access Server (NAS) uses RADIUS to authenticate AAA or dot1x user-access to the switch. The RADIUS service does not support unsolicited messages sent from the RADIUS server to the NAS. However, there are many instances in which it is desirable for changes to be made to session characteristics, without requiring the NAS to initiate the exchange.
Table 84. Change of Authorization (CoA) Attribute Attribute code Attribute Description 5 NAS-Port Port associated with the session to be processed for EAP or MAB users or the VTY ID for AAA sessions. Table 85. Session Identification Attributes Attribute code Attribute Description 31 Calling-Station-Id (MAC Address) The link address from which session is connected. Table 86.
Table 88. CoA EAP/MAB Session(s) Re-authenticate (continued) Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory 26 Vendor-Specific t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendoridentification-attribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=re-authenticate” Yes Table 89. CoA EAP/MAB Disable Port Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory NAS Identification Attributes 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS.
Table 91. DM EAP/MAB Session(s) disconnect (continued) Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory 26 Vendor-Specific t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendoridentification-attribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=terminate-session” Yes Table 92. DM AAA Session(s) disconnect Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory NAS Identification Attributes 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS.
Table 93. Error-cause Values (continued) Serial Number Error-cause Scenarios ● CoA with re-authenticate or terminate request not containing calling-stationid or NAS-Port attribute. ● CoA with disable-port or bounce-port request not containing NAS-Port attribute. ● DM request not containing user-name attribute. CoA Packet Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during CoA packet processing.
○ Identifier ○ Length ○ 16 Zero Octets ○ Request Attributes ○ Shared secret (based on the source IP address of the packet) ● discards the packets, if the message-authenticator received in the request is invalid. The message-authenticator is calculated using the following fields: ○ Code Type ○ Identifier ○ Length ○ Request Authenticator ○ Attributes Disconnect Message Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during DM processing.
Configuring shared key You can configure a global shared key for the dynamic authorization clients (DACs). 1. Enter the following command to enter dynamic authorization mode: radius dynamic-auth 2.
NAS disables the authentication port that is hosting the session and re-enables it after 10 seconds. All user sessions connected to this authentication port are affected. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-bounce-port NAS takes the following actions whenever port-bounce is triggered: ● validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes. ● sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain the NAS-port attributes.
Terminating the 802.1x user session Dell EMC Networking OS provides RADIUS extension commands that terminate the 802.1x user session. When this request is initiated, the NAS disconnects the 802.1x user session without disabling the physical port that authenticated the current session. Before terminating the 802.1x user session, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: ● Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
● sends a CoA-Ack, if it is able to successfully disable the 802.1x enabled port. ● sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause value of 506 (resource unavailable), if it is not able to disable the 802.1x enabled port. ● discards the packet, if simultaneous requests are received for the same NAS Port. Important points to remember Virtual link truncking (VLT) scenario This section describes how the secondary NAS processes the PE port authorization RADIUS requests to the primary NAS.
NAS considers the rate limit change value from the next interval period. The range is from 10 to 60 packets per minute. The default is 30 packets per minute. Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)rate-limit 50 Configuring time-out value You can configure a time-out value for the back-end task to respond to CoA or DM requests. This setting enables the DAS to determine the amount of time to wait before a back-end response is received. The default value is 10 minutes.
4. Assign the method-list to the terminal line. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config in LINE mode or the show running-config tacacs+ command in EXEC Privilege mode. If authentication fails using the primary method, Dell EMC Networking OS employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically.
configured a deny10 ACL on the TACACS+ server, the system downloads it and applies it. If the user is found to be coming from the 10.0.0.0 subnet, the system also immediately closes the Telnet connection. Note, that no matter where the user is coming from, they see the login prompt. When configuring a TACACS+ server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the key password.
Protection from TCP Tiny and Overlapping Fragment Attacks Tiny and overlapping fragment attack is a class of attack where configured ACL entries — denying TCP port-specific traffic — is bypassed and traffic is sent to its destination although denied by the ACL. RFC 1858 and 3128 proposes a countermeasure to the problem. This countermeasure is configured into the line cards and enabled by default.
Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy (SCP) to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another, use the following commands. 1. On Switch 1, set the SSH port number ( port 22 by default). CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2. On Switch 1, enable SSH. CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3. On Switch 2, invoke SCP. CONFIGURATION MODE copy scp: flash: 4.
To remove the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location, use the crypto key zeroize rsa command in CONFIGURATION mode. DellEMC(conf)#crypto key zeroize rsa Configuring When to Re-generate an SSH Key You can configure the time-based or volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. If both threshold types are configured, the session rekeys when either one of the thresholds is reached.
Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Server To configure the HMAC algorithm for the SSH server, use the ip ssh server mac hmac-algorithm command in CONFIGURATION mode. hmac-algorithm: Enter a space-delimited list of keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server.
Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list. DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh mac hmac-sha1-96 Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH server, use the ip ssh server cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH server will support. The following ciphers are available.
Configuring DNS in the SSH Server Dell EMC Networking provides support to enable the DNS in SSH server configuration for host-based authentication. You can specify whether the SSH Server should look up the remote host name and check whether the resolved host name for the remote IP address maps to the same IP address. By default, the DNS in the SSH server configuration is disabled. To enable the DNS in the SSH server configuration, use the following command. ● Enable the DNS in the SSH server configuration.
2. Copy the public key id_rsa.pub to the Dell EMC Networking system. 3. Disable password authentication if enabled. CONFIGURATION mode no ip ssh password-authentication enable 4. Enable RSA authentication in SSH. CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication enable 5. Install user’s public key for RSA authentication in SSH.
ssh_host_rsa_key admin@Unix_client# cat ssh_host_rsa_key.pub ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8K7jLZRVfjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx/ AyWhVgJDQh39k8v3e8eQvLnHBIsqIL8jVy1QHhUeb7GaDlJVEDAMz30myqQbJgXBBRTWgBpLWwL/ doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChjk9hL1by8cYZP2kYS2lnSyQWk= admin@Unix_client# ls id_rsa id_rsa.pub shosts admin@Unix_client# cat shosts 10.16.127.
The Telnet server or client is VRF-aware. You can enable a Telnet server or client to listen to a specific VRF by using the vrf vrf-instance-name parameter in the telnet command. This capability enables a Telent server or client to look up the correct routing table and establish a connection. Example of Using Telnet for Remote Login DellEMC(conf)#ip telnet server enable DellEMC(conf)#no ip telnet server enable VTY Line and Access-Class Configuration Various methods are available to restrict VTY access in .
DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 9 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#login authentication localmethod DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization retrieves the access class from the VTY line. The takes the access class from the VTY line and applies it to ALL users. does not need to know the identity of the incoming user and can immediately apply the access class.
● Creating a New User Role ● Modifying Command Permissions for Roles ● Adding and Deleting Users from a Role ● Role Accounting ● Configuring AAA Authentication for Roles ● Configuring AAA Authorization for Roles ● Configuring an Accounting for Roles ● Applying an Accounting Method to a Role ● Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles ● Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC ● Displaying User Roles ● Displaying Accounting for User Roles ● Displaying Information About Roles Logged into t
Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization You can configure authorization so that access to commands is determined only by the user’s role. If the user has no user role, access to the system is denied as the user is not able to login successfully.
● Network Operator (netoperator) - This user role has no privilege to modify any configuration on the switch. You can access Exec mode (monitoring) to view the current configuration and status information. ● Network Administrator (netadmin): This user role can configure, display, and debug the network operations on the switch. You can access all of the commands that are available from the network operator user role.
Example of Creating a User Role The configuration in the following example creates a new user role, myrole, which inherits the security administrator (secadmin) permissions. Create a new user role, myrole and inherit security administrator permissions. DellEMC(conf)#userrole myrole inherit secadmin Verify that the user role, myrole, has inherited the security administrator permissions.
Example: Allow Security Administrator to Access Interface Mode The following example allows the security administrator (secadmin) to access Interface mode.
In the following example the command protocol permissions are reset to their original setting or one or more of the systemdefined roles and any roles that inherited permissions from them. DellEMC(conf)#role configure reset protocol Adding and Deleting Users from a Role To create a user name that is authenticated based on a user role, use the username name password encryption-type password role role-name command in CONFIGURATION mode.
Configure AAA Authorization for Roles Authorization services determine if the user has permission to use a command in the CLI. Users with only privilege levels can use commands in privilege-or-role mode (the default) provided their privilege level is the same or greater than the privilege level of those commands. Users with defined roles can use commands provided their role is permitted to use those commands. Role inheritance is also used to determine authorization.
authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 6 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 7 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 8 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 9 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin ! ucraaa ucraaa ucraaa ucraaa ucraaa Configuring T
● Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles To configure AAA accounting for roles, use the aaa accounting command in CONFIGURATION mode. aaa accounting {system | exec | commands {level | role role-name}} {name | default} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} Example of Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role.
netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin testadmin Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
● If the credentials are invalid, the authentication fails. NOTE: 2FA does not support RADIUS authentications done with REST, Web UI, and OMI. Handling Access-Challenge Message To provide a two-step verification in addition to the username and password, NAS prompts for additional information. An Access-Challenge request is sent from the RADIUS server to NAS.
Configuring the System to Drop Certain ICMP Reply Messages You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages. When you configure the drop icmp command, the system drops the ICMP reply messages from the front end and management interfaces. By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS responds to all the ICMP messages. ● Drop the ICMP or ICMPv6 message type. drop {icmp | icmp6} CONFIGURATION mode.
Table 96.
● The OS image verification feature is supported for images stored in the local system only. ● The OS image verification feature is not supported when the fastboot or the warmboot features are enabled on the system. ● If OS image verification fails after a reload, the system does not load the startup configuration. The System displays an appropriate error message until the no verified boot command is used on the system.
● If the startup configuration verification fails after a reload, the system does not load your startup configuration. ● After enabling the startup configuration verification feature, use the verified boot hash command to verify and store the hash value. If you don’t store the hash value, you cannot reboot the device until you verify the image hash.
When you configure the root access password, ensure that your password meets the following criteria: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A A A A A minimum minimum minimum minimum minimum of of of of of eight characters in length one lower case letter (a to z) one upper case letter (A to Z) one numeric character (0 to 9) one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") DellEMC)# show running-config | g root root-access password 7 f4dc0cb9787722dd1084d17f417f164cc7f730d4f03d4f0215294cbd899614e3 Enabl
46 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Provider Backbone Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.
Figure 116. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember ● Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. ● Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. ● Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 5 6 Status Active Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active DellEMC# Q Ports U Te 3/0-5,18 M Po1(Te 3/14-15) M Te 3/13 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag The tag protocol identifier (TPID) field of the S-Tag is user-configurable. To set the S-Tag TPID, use the following command. ● Select a value for the S-Tag TPID. CONFIGURATION mode vlan-stack protocol-type The default is 9100.
Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM * 1 100 101 103 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports U Te 1/1 T Te 1/1 M Te 1/1 Debugging VLAN Stacking To debug VLAN stacking, use the following command. ● Debug the internal state and membership of a VLAN and its ports. debug member The port notations are as follows: ● MT — stacked trunk ● MU — stacked access port ● T — 802.
For example, if you configure TPID 0x9100, the system treats 0x8100 and untagged traffic the same and maps both types to the default VLAN, as shown by the frame originating from Building C. For the same traffic types, if you configure TPID 0x8100, the system is able to differentiate between 0x8100 and untagged traffic and maps each to the appropriate VLAN, as shown by the packet originating from Building A.
Figure 118.
Figure 119. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 97. Drop Eligibility Behavior (continued) Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. ● Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
To display the DEI-marking configuration, use the show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port ] in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show interface dei-mark Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0 Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI -------------------------------Te 1/1 Green 0 Te 1/1 Yellow 1 Te 2/9 Yellow 0 Te 2/10 Yellow 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired.
Examples of QoS Interface Configuration and Rate Policing policy-map-input in layer2 service-queue 3 class-map a qos-policy 3 ! class-map match-any a layer2 match mac access-group a ! mac access-list standard a seq 5 permit any ! qos-policy-input 3 layer2 rate-police 40 Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3.
NOTE: Because dot1p-mapping marks and queues packets, the only remaining applicable QoS configuration is rate metering. You may use Rate Shaping or Rate Policing. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80-C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: In Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell EMC Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
show cam-profile 2. Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3. Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
47 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
● If the global sampling rate is non-default, for example 256, and if the sampling rate is not configured on the interface, the sampling rate of the interface is the global non-default sampling rate, that is, 256. To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured.
If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold). DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected 0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Enabling and Disabling sFlow on an Interface By default, sFlow is disabled on all interfaces.
Example of viewing the sflow max-header-size extended on an Interface Mode DellEMC#show sflow interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Te 1/1 sFlow type :Ingress Configured sampling rate :16384 Actual sampling rate :16384 Counter polling interval :20 Extended max header size :256 Samples rcvd from h/w :0 Example of the show running-config sflow Command DellEMC#show running-config sflow ! sflow collector 100.1.1.12 agent-addr 100.1.1.
Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface To view sFlow information on a specific interface, use the following command. ● Display sFlow configuration information and statistics on a specific interface. EXEC mode show sflow interface interface-name The following example shows the show sflow interface command.
Changing the Polling Intervals The sflow polling-interval command configures the polling interval for an interface in the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of counters sent to the collector. This command changes the global default counter polling (20 seconds) interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval. To configure the polling intervals globally (in CONFIGURATION mode) or by interface (in INTERFACE mode), use the following command.
The bold line shows that extended sFlow settings are enabled on all three types. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
Table 98. Extended Gateway Summary (continued) IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description Version 7.8.1.0 allows extended gateway information in cases where the source and destination IP addresses are learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where is source is reachable over ECMP. BGP BGP Exported Exported Extended gateway data is packed.
48 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
• • • Troubleshooting SNMP Operation Transceiver Monitoring Configuring SNMP context name Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
In this example, for a specified user and a group, the AES128-CFB algorithm, the authentication password to enable the server to receive packets from the host, and the privacy password to encode the message contents are configured. SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level.
Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models. The primary difference between the two versions is that version 2 supports two additional protocol operations (informs operation and snmpgetbulk query) and one additional object (counter64 object). SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy.
● Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. ● Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password ● Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only).
In the following example, the value “4” displays in the OID before the IP address for IPv4. For an IPv6 IP address, a value of “16” displays. > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysUpTime.0 DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (32852616) 3 days, 19:15:26.16 > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 The following example shows reading the value of the next managed object. > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.
The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysContact.0 s “contact-info” You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the physical location of the system (for example, San Jose, 350 Holger Way, 1st floor lab, rack A1-1).
snmp linkdown snmp linkup PORT_LINKDN:changed interface state to down:%d PORT_LINKUP:changed interface state to up:%d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps using one of the following listed command options. To enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps, use the following command. ● Enable a subset of SNMP traps.
vlt Enable VLT traps. vrrp Enable VRRP state change traps xstp %SPANMGR-5-STP_NEW_ROOT: New Spanning Tree Root, Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.fc35. %SPANMGR-5-STP_TOPOLOGY_CHANGE: Bridge port TenGigabitEthernet 1/8 transitioned from Forwarding to Blocking state. %SPANMGR-5-MSTP_NEW_ROOT_BRIDGE: Elected root bridge for instance 0. %SPANMGR-5-MSTP_NEW_ROOT_PORT: MSTP root changed to port Te 1/8 for instance 0. My Bridge ID: 40960:0001.e801.fc35 Old Root: 40960:0001.e801.
To enable an SNMP agent to send a trap when the syslog server is not reachable, enter the following command: CONFIGURATION MODE snmp-server enable traps snmp syslog-unreachable To enable an SNMP agent to send a trap when the syslog server resumes connectivity, enter the following command: CONFIGURATION MODE snmp-server enable traps snmp syslog-reachable Table 100. List of Syslog Server MIBS that have read access MIB Object OID Object Values Description dF10SysLogTraps 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.30.1.
Table 101. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP MIB Object OID Object Values Description copySrcFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2 1 = Dell EMC Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy from. The range is: ● If copySrcFileType is running-config or startupconfig, the default copySrcFileLocation is flash. ● If copySrcFileType is a binary file, you must also specify copySrcFileLocation and copySrcFileName. 2 = running-config 3 = startup-config copySrcFileLocation .1.
Table 101. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyUserName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.9 Username for the server. Username for the FTP, TFTP, or SCP server. ● If you specify copyUserName, you must also specify copyUserPassword. copyUserPassword .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.10 Password for the server. Password for the FTP, TFTP, or SCP server.
snmpset -v 2c -c public force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileType.index i 3 The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, a unique index number follows the object. The following example shows copying configuration files using MIB object names. > snmpset -v 2c -r 0 -t 60 -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.101 i 2 copyDestFileType.
FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyUserName.110 = STRING: mylogin FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyUserPassword.110 = STRING: mypass Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via TFTP To copy the startup-config to the server via TFTP from the UNIX machine, use the following command. NOTE: Verify that the file exists and its permissions are set to 777. Specify the relative path to the TFTP root directory. ● Copy the startup-config to the server via TFTP from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m .
Table 102. Additional MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Values Description 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.15 Row status Specifies the state of the copy operation. Uses CreateAndGo when you are performing the copy. The state is set to active when the copy is completed. Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command.
MIB Support to Display Reason for Last System Reboot Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the reason for the last system reboot. The dellNetProcessorResetReason object contains the reason for the last system reboot. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 103. MIB Objects for Displaying Reason for Last System Reboot MIB Object OID Description dellNetProcessorResetReason 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.3.1.7 This is the table that contains the reason for last system reboot.
SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5.11 = INTEGER: 48 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5.12 = INTEGER: 40 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6.11 = INTEGER: 31 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6.12 = INTEGER: 26 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.
Table 105. MIB Objects to Display support for 25G, 40G, 50G, 100G Optical Transceiver or DAC cable IDPROM user info (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetIfTransTemperature 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.16 Specifies Temperature value of the Optics inserted SNMP Example Output (Single Interface) DellEMC$ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -m all -M 10.16.150.140 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3 | grep 2112517 DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransDeviceName.
MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system. The chSysSwCoresTable contains the list of software core files generated by the system. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 107. MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System MIB Object OID Description chSysSwCoresTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.
MIB Support for CAM Dell EMC Networking provides a method to retrieve the CAM usage information. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 108. MIB Objects for CAM MIB Object OID Description camUsageL2Pi 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.2.1.11 peLine Contains information about the pipe line number of the chip on the layer 2 switch where CAM is located. camUsageL3Pi 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.3.1.
Table 109. MIB Objects to Display the Information for PFC Storm Control MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpPfcStormControl 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21 Index for the table. dellNetFpPfcStormControlStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1 Storm control status. dellNetFpPfcStormControlStatusTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1 Table to show counters of Pfc StormControl on per port per priority basis. dellNetFpPfcStormControlStatusEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097925.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097925.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097157.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097157.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097413.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097413.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097669.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097669.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.4.2097925.
Table 110. MIB Objects to Display the Information for PFC no-drop-priority L2Dlf Drop (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1 Number of packets dropped due to Pfcnodrop-priority l2-dlfdrop feature. SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.134.51 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.0 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.22.1.1.1.1.1 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.4 = = = = Counter32: Counter32: Counter32: Counter32: 130 0 102 0 SNMP Support for WRED Green/Yellow/Red Drop Counters Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for WRED Green (Green Drops)/Yellow (Yellow Drops)/Red (Out of Profile Drops) Drop Counters.
MIB Support to Display the Available Partitions on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information of various partitions such as /flash, /tmp, /usr/ pkg, and /f10/ConfD. The dellNetFlashStorageTable table contains the list of all partitions on disk. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 113. MIB Objects to Display the Available Partitions on Flash MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.1 Index for the table.
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.
SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.
SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.
Table 116. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable (continued) MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1 Contains information about a particular logical entity. entAliasLogicalIndexOrZero 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.1 Contains a non–zero value and identifies the logical entity named by the same value of entLogicalIndex. entAliasMappingIdentifier 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.
Table 117. MIB Objects for Displaying the Details of FCS Error Ratio (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpIngPortBitMapZeroDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.8 Port bitmap zero drop condition. dellNetFpIngRxVLANDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.9 Rx VLAN drop condition. dellNetFpIngressFCSDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10 Ingress FCS Drops. dellNetFpIngressMTUExceeds 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11 Ingress MTUExceeds. dellNetFpMMUHOLDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1049860 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1049988 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050116 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050244 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050372 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050500 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050629 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051141 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051653 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.
Table 118. MIB Objects for LAG (continued) MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.
● To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356736 iso.2.840.
iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 = STRING: "Dell" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.10 = STRING: "Dell" snmpget -v2c -c public 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 = STRING: "Dell" MIB Support to Display Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs The lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable contains organizationally defined information that is not recognized by the local neighbor. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 120.
MIB support for Port Security Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB objects to enable or disable port security feature on the physical and port channel interfaces. The port security DELL-NETWORKING-PORT-SECURITY-MIB object contains both the global and interface level MIB objects. Global MIB objects for port security This section describes about the scalar MIB objects of the global MIB dellNetPortSecGlobalObjects. The following table shows the scalar global MIB objects for port security. Table 121.
Table 122. Interface level MIB Objects for Port Security (continued) MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetPortSecIfStationMove Enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.5 read-write Enable or disable station movement on the dynamically secured MAC addresses learnt on the interface. dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacVi olationAction 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.6 read-write Determines the action to be taken when MAC limit violation occurs in the system.
MAC addresses cannot be retrieved using dellNetPortSecSecureStaticMacAddrTable and dellNetPortSecSecureMacAddrTable. These tables are valid only if port security feature is enabled globally in the system. Table 123. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetPortSecIfSecureStatic MacRowStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.2.1.4 read-write Allows adding or deleting entries to or from the table dellNetPortSecSecureStaticM acAddrTable.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.4.6.0.0.0.0.17.17.10 = INTEGER: 1 MIB support for MAC notification traps Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB support to generate SNMP trap messages on learning or station move of a new or existing MAC address in the system with mac–address, vlan–id, and port details. The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID, and description for the same: Table 125. MIB Objects for MAC notification traps MIB Object OID Description dellNetMacNotifMib 1.3.6.1.4.1.
Manage VLANs using SNMP The qBridgeMIB managed objects in Q-BRIDGE-MIB, defined in RFC 2674, allows you to use SNMP to manage VLANs. Creating a VLAN To create a VLAN, use the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. The snmpset operation shown in the following example creates VLAN 10 by specifying a value of 4 for instance 10 of the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 123.45.6.78 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.10 i 4 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.1107787786 x "40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.
To set time to wait till bgp session are up set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.3 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.6 Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1. Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2. From the Dell EMC Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status.
The value of dot1dTpFdbPort is the port number of the port off which the system learns the MAC address. In this case, of TenGigabitEthernet 1/21, the manager returns the integer 118.
MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions To view the system image on Flash Partition A, use the chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers object or, to view the system image on Flash Partition B, use the chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers object. Table 127. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A.
● snmp-server context cx2 ● snmp-server group admingroup 3 auth read readview write writeview ● snmp-server group admingroup 3 auth read readview context cx1 ● snmp-server group admingroup 3 auth read readview context cx2 ● snmp-server user admin admingroup 3 auth md5 helloworld ● snmp mib community-map VRF1 context cx1 ● snmp mib community-map VRF2 context cx2 ● snmp-server view readview .1 included ● snmp-server view writeview .1 included 2. Configure snmp context under the VRF instances.
Monitor Port-Channels To check the status of a Layer 2 port-channel, use f10LinkAggMib (.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2). In the following example, Po 1 is a switchport and Po 2 is in Layer 3 mode. Example of SNMP Trap for Monitored Port-Channels [senthilnathan@lithium ~]$ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.11.1.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.1.2 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.2.
IF-MIB::linkUp IF-MIB::ifIndex.1107755009 = INTEGER: 1107755009 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Po 1" Troubleshooting SNMP Operation When you use SNMP to retrieve management data from an SNMP agent on a Dell EMC Networking router, take into account the following behavior. ● When you query an IPv4 icmpMsgStatsInPkts object in the ICMP table by using the snmpwalk command, the output for echo replies may be incorrectly displayed.
Table 128. SNMP OIDs for Transceiver Monitoring (continued) Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.4 Optics Type SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.5 Vendor Name SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.6 Part Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.7 Serial Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.8 Transmit Power Lane1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.9 Transmit Power Lane2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
49 Stacking Using the Dell EMC Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 0 to 6 and the S6000 supports stacking up to six units with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0).
Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. ● Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0. By removing the stack-unit priority using the no stack-unit priority command, you can set the priority back to the default value of zero. The unit with the highest priority is elected the master management unit; the unit with the second highest priority is elected the standby unit.
Virtual IP You can manage the stack using a single IP, known as a virtual IP, that is retained in the stack even after a failover. The virtual IP address is used to log in to the current master unit of the stack. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported as virtual IPs. Use the following command to configure a virtual IP: Dell(conf)#virtual-ip {ip-address | ipv6–address | dhcp} Failover Roles If the stack master fails (for example, is powered off), it is removed from the stack topology.
2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present 7 Member not present [output omitted] Stack#show system stack-unit 0 | grep priority Master priority : 0 Stack#show system stack-unit 1 | grep priority Master priority : 0 Example of Adding a Standalone with a Lower MAC Address and Equal Priority to a Stack ---------------STANDALONE AFTER CONNECTION----------------Standalone#%STKUNIT0-M:CP %POLLMGR-2-ALT_STACK_UNIT_STATE: Alternate Stack-unit is present
Figure 123. Supported Stacking Topologies High Availability on Stacks Stacks have master and standby management units analogous to Dell EMC Networking route processor modules (RPM). The master unit synchronizes the running configuration and protocol states so that the system fails over in the event of a hardware or software fault on the master unit. In such an event, or when the master unit is removed, the standby unit becomes the stack manager and Dell EMC Networking OS elects a new standby unit.
exit format fsck pwd rename reset show ssh-peer-stack-unit start telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal upload Dell(standby)# Exit from the EXEC Format a filesystem Filesystem check utility Display current working directory Rename a file Reset selected card Show running system information Open a SSH connection to the peer stack-unit Start shell Open a telnet connection to the peer stack-unit Set terminal line parameters Upload file -----------------CONSOLE ACCESS ON A MEMBER---------------------------Dell(stack-
Figure 124. Stack-Group Assignments You can connect the units while they are powered down or up. Stacking ports are bidirectional. When a unit is added to a stack, the management unit performs a system check on the new unit to ensure the hardware type is compatible. A similar check is performed on the Dell EMC Networking OS version. If the stack is running Dell EMC Networking OS version9.7.0.0and the new unit is running an earlier software version, the new unit is put into a card problem state.
EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 4. After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up in a stack after the reboot completes. To view the port assignments, use the show system stack-unit command.
Figure 125. Creating a new stack In the above example, stack unit 1 is the master management unit, stack unit 2 is the standby unit. The cables are connected to each unit.
Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Member not present S6000 1 Member not present 2 Standby online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 3 Member not present S6000 4 Member not present 5 Management online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) ------------------------------------------------------
stack-unit stack-unit-number priority priority-number 4. Assign a stack group to each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unitstack-unit-number stack-group stack-group-number 5. Connect the new unit to the stack using stacking cables. The following example shows adding a stack unit with a conflicting stack number (before).
EXEC Privilege mode write memory 7. Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 8. If a standalone switch already has stack groups configured. Attach cables to connect the ports already configured as stack groups on the switch to one or more switches in the stack.
● Recover from Stack Link Flaps Assigning Unit Numbers to Units in an Stack Each unit in the stack has a stack number that is either assigned by you or Dell EMC Networking OS. Stack numbers are stored in NVRAM and are preserved upon reload. ● Assign a stack-number to a unit. EXEC Privilege mode stack-unit old-unit-number renumber new-unit-number Renumbering the stack manager triggers the whole stack to reload, as shown in the message below.
Hardware Rev : 4.
4 5 Member Management not present online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up AC up 6720 2 1 up AC up 6688 5 0 up AC up 6688 5 1 down UNKNOWN down 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up up 7072 up 6971 2 1 up up 7021 up 7021 2 2 up up 7021 up 6971 5 0 up up 7
redundancy force-failover stack-unit A new standby is elected. When the former stack master comes back online, it becomes a member unit. ● Prevent the stack master from rebooting after a failover. CONFIGURATION mode redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit This command does not affect a forced failover, manual reset, or a stack-link disconnect. ● Display redundancy information.
4/52 6/48 4/56 4/48 DellEMC# 42 42 up up up up The following example shows the parameters for the management unit in the stack. DellEMC#show system stack-unit 5 -- Unit 5 -Unit Type : Management Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S6000 - 32-port TE/FG (SI) Current Type : S6000 - 32-port TE/FG (SI) Master priority : 234881024 Hardware Rev : 4.
Remove Units or Front End Ports from a Stack To remove units or front end ports from a stack, use the following instructions. ● Removing a Unit from a Stack ● Removing Front End Port Stacking Removing a Unit from a Stack The running-configuration and startup-configuration are synchronized on all stack units. A stack member that is disconnected from the stack maintains this configuration. To remove a stack member from the stack, disconnect the stacking cables from the unit.
write memory 3. Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up as standalone units after the reboot completes. Troubleshoot a Stack To troubleshoot a stack, use the following recovery tasks.
0 1 2 3 4 5 Member Member Standby Member Member Management not present not present online not present not present online S6000 unknown 128 S6000 S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up AC up 6720 2 1 up AC up 6688 5 0 up AC up 6688 5 1 down UNKNOWN down 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed ------------------------
50 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknownunicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in ● Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets.
● Use the xoff-state threshold polling-count {number of polling-interval} command to set the number of times the polling should be done. If the traffic and the egress counter remain the same after the subsequent polling, then the corresponding port or priority is detected to have PFC storm. ● Once PFC storm is detected on an interface, you can use the storm-control pfc in queue-drop command on the interface to drop the ingress packets.
Te 0/3 Te 0/4 Te 0/5 Te 0/80 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# Storm Control 881
51 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group Modifying Global Parameters Modifying Interface STP Parameters Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Important Points to Remember ● STP is disabled by default. ● The Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0).
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 126. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default. When you enable STP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the Spanning Tree topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge participating in STP is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. Figure 127.
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. R2#show spanning-tree 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0001.e826.ddb7 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.
Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the spanning tree parameters. Poorly planned modification of the spanning tree parameters can negatively affect network performance. The following table displays the default values for STP. Table 130.
Modifying Interface STP Parameters You can set the port cost and port priority values of interfaces in Layer 2 mode. ● Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. ● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. The default values are listed in Modifying Global Parameters.
Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Configure the Portfast (and Edgeport, in the case of RSTP, PVST+, and MSTP) feature on ports that connect to end stations. End stations do not generate BPDUs, so ports configured with Portfast/ Edgport (edgeports) do not expect to receive BDPUs. If an edgeport does receive a BPDU, it likely means that it is connected to another part of the network, which can negatively affect the STP topology.
Figure 128. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: ● is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. ● drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
Figure 129. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: ● Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands. ● Enable SNMP traps for spanning tree state changes. snmp-server enable traps stp ● Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively.
Figure 130. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: ● Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
● When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a Loop-Inconsistent (Blocking) state only for this VLAN. To enable a loop guard on an STP-enabled port or port-channel interface, use the following command. ● Enable loop guard on a port or port-channel interface.
52 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 131.
Enable the SupportAssist service. CONFIGURATION mode support-assist activate DellEMC(conf)#support-assist activate This command guides you through steps to configure SupportAssist. Configuring SupportAssist Manually To manually configure SupportAssist service, use the following commands. 1. Accept the end-user license agreement (EULA). CONFIGURATION mode eula-consent {support-assist} {accept | reject} NOTE: Once accepted, you do not have to accept the EULA again.
support-assist DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)# 3. (Optional) Configure the contact information for the company. SUPPORTASSIST mode contact-company name {company-name}[company-next-name] ... [company-next-name] DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-company name test DellEMC(conf-supportassist-cmpy-test)# 4. (Optional) Configure the contact name for an individual.
[no] activity {full-transfer|core-transfer|event-transfer} DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity core-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity event-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system.
SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY mode [no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company.
[no] contact-person [first ] last DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-person first john last doe DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 2. Configure the email addresses to reach the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person.
[no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 4. Configure the URL to reach the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] url uniform-resource-locator DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands: 1.
! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1337 DellEMC# 3. Display the EULA for the feature. EXEC Privilege mode show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} DellEMC#show eula-consent support-assist SupportAssist EULA has been: Accepted Additional information about the SupportAssist EULA is as follows: By installing SupportAssist, you allow Dell to save your contact information (e.g.
53 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
To display the system clock state with respect to NTP, use the show ntp status command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 10.16.151.117, vrf-id is 0 frequency is -44.862 ppm, stability is 0.050 ppm, precision is -18 reference time deeef7ef.85eeaa10 Tue, Jul 10 2018 9:16:31.523 UTC clock offset is -0.167449 msec, root delay is 149.194 msec root dispersion is 54.557 msec, peer dispersion is 0.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
5. Configure the switch as NTP master. CONFIGURATION mode ntp master To configure the switch as NTP Server use the ntp master command. stratum number identifies the NTP Server's hierarchy. The following example shows configuring an NTP server. Dell EMC(conf)#show running-config ntp ! ntp master ntp server 10.16.127.44 ntp server 10.16.127.86 ntp server 10.16.127.
● Transmit Timestamp — the departure time on the server of the current NTP message from the sender. ● Filter dispersion — the error in calculating the minimum delay from a set of sample data from a peer. To view the NTP configuration, use the show running-config ntp command in EXEC privilege mode. The following example shows an encrypted authentication key (in bold). All keys are encrypted. DellEMC#show running ntp ! ntp authenticate ntp authentication-key 345 md5 5A60910F3D211F02 ntp server 11.1.1.
Setting the Time and Date for the Switch Software Clock You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day month year. You cannot delete the software clock. The software clock runs only when the software is up. The clock restarts, based on the hardware clock, when the switch reboots. To set the software clock, use the following command. ● Set the system software clock to the current time and date.
CONFIGURATION mode clock summer-time time-zone date start-month start-day start-year start-time end-month end-day end-year end-time [offset] ○ time-zone: enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name displays in the show clock output. ○ start-month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ start-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31.
○ end-day: Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ end-year: Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. ○ end-time: Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. ○ offset: (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
54 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.2 tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels ● You can configure up to eight remote end-points for a multipoint receive-only tunnel.
55 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Figure 133. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 134. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
● If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5. (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode no enable The default is upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group.
02:38:53: Fo 3/48 02:38:53: Fo 3/52 02:38:53: Fo 3/56 02:38:53: Fo 3/60 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTAT
Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/1(Dwn) Te 1/3(Dwn) Te 1/5(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 3/2(Dis) Te 3/4(Dis) Te 3/11(Dis) Te 3/12(Dis) Te 3/13(Dis) Te 3/14(Dis) Te 3/15(Dis) Uplink State Group : 6 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 7 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/4(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : T
upstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/22 upstream Port-channel 8 Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection The following example shows a sample configuration of UFD on a switch/router in which you configure as follows. ● ● ● ● ● ● Configure uplink-state group 3. Add downstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/1, 1/2, 1/5, 1/9, 1/11, and 1/12. Configure two downstream links to be disabled if an upstream link fails. Add upstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/3 and 1/4. Add a text description for the group.
56 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
57 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. ● Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN.
● The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). ● Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total). The VLAN ID can have 4,096 values, but two are reserved. NOTE: The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1,518 bytes as specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard. Some devices that are not compliant with IEEE 802.3 may not support the larger frame size.
Assigning Interfaces to a VLAN You can only assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN using the tagged and untagged commands. To place an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. You can further designate these Layer 2 interfaces as tagged or untagged. For more information, see the Interfaces chapter and Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode.
When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN (using the no tagged interface command), it remains tagged only if it is a tagged interface in another VLAN. If the tagged interface is removed from the only VLAN to which it belongs, the interface is placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface. Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface.
Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces. The shutdown command in INTERFACE mode does not affect Layer 2 traffic on the interface; the shutdown command only prevents Layer 3 traffic from traversing over the interface. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN (VLAN 1).
Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN In a Carrier Ethernet for Metro Service environment, service providers who perform frequent reconfigurations for customers with changing requirements occasionally enable multiple interfaces, each connected to a different customer, before the interfaces are fully configured. This presents a vulnerability because both interfaces are initially placed in the native VLAN, VLAN 1, and for that period customers are able to access each other's networks.
58 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
peers as a single switch, VLT eliminates STP-blocked ports. However, the two VLT devices are independent Layer2/Layer3 (L2/L3) switches for devices in the upstream network. Figure 137. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol.
Figure 138. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
● VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. ● VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces. ● VLT domain — This domain includes both the VLT peer devices, VLT interconnect, and all of the port channels in the VLT connected to the attached devices.
Viewing the MAC Synchronization Between VLT Peers You can use the following commands to verify the MAC synchronization between VLT peers: VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-address-table count MAC Entries for all vlans : Dynamic Address Count : 1007 Static Address (User-defined) Count : 1 Sticky Address Count : 0 Total Synced Mac from Peer(N): 503 Total MAC Addresses in Use: 1008 VLT-10-PEER-1#show vlt counter mac Total MAC VLT counters ---------------------L2 Total MAC-Address Count: 1007 VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-addr
such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks. The following example shows stacking at the access, VLT in aggregation, and Layer 3 at the core. Figure 140. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer.
Figure 141. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior can occur. VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT.
● o disable this feature on VLT and port channels, use no lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | portchannel} command under the configuration mode. ● When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval.
○ VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached on non-VLT ports. ○ One device in the VLT domain is assigned a primary role; the other device takes the secondary role. The primary and secondary roles are required for scenarios when connectivity between the chassis is lost. VLT assigns the primary chassis role according to the lowest MAC address. You can configure the primary role manually.
● ● ● ● ● ○ In order that the chassis backup link does not share the same physical path as the interconnect trunk, Dell EMC Networking recommends using the management ports on the chassis and traverse an out-of-band management network. The backup link can use user ports, but not the same ports the interconnect trunk uses. ○ The chassis backup link does not carry control plane information or data traffic. Its use is restricted to health checks only.
○ In a VLT domain, VRRP interoperates with virtual link trunks that carry traffic to and from access devices (see Overview). The VLT peers belong to the same VRRP group and are assigned master and backup roles. Each peer actively forwards L3 traffic, reducing the traffic flow over the VLT interconnect. ○ VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group.
● Configure any ports at the edge of the spanning tree’s operating domain as edge ports, which are directly connected to end stations or server racks. Disable RSTP on ports connected directly to Layer 3-only routers not running STP or configure them as edge ports. ● Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network.
VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up, if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start-up configuration, they are not immediately enabled. To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node, the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic. The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer.
Figure 142. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
If the VLT node elected as the designated router fails and you enable VLT Multicast Routing, multicast routes are synced to the other peer for traffic forwarding to ensure minimal traffic loss. If you did not enable VLT Multicast Routing, traffic loss occurs until the other VLT peer is selected as the DR. VLT Routing VLT Routing refers to the ability to run a dynamic routing protocol within a single VLT domain or between VLT domains (mVLT).
If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 144. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing ● ● Avoids sub-optimal routing ● Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
Configuring VLT Unicast To enable and configure VLT unicast, follow these steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2. Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3. Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity (without configuring the timeout).
3. Configure the multicast peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode multicast peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 1200. NOTE: Reduce the multicast peer-routing-timeout value to 10 seconds to clear the (S,G) entry in mroute in primary VLT peer. Also, the MLD leave packet must be sent after the unicast route convergence. 4. Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR). For more information, refer to Configuring a Designated Router. 5.
Sample RSTP configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration: Using the example shown in the Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
Configuring a VLT Interconnect To configure a VLT interconnect, follow these steps. 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 5. (Optional) After you configure a VLT domain on each peer switch and connect (cable) the two VLT peers on each side of the VLT interconnect, the system elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device (see Primary and Secondary VLT Peers). To configure the primary and secondary roles before the election process, use the primary-priority command.
delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 5. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 6.
CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 4. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 5. Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages.
INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15. Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16. Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2.
show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13. Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell EMC Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
configuring VLT peer lag in VLT Dell-2#show running-config interface port-channel 2 ! interface Port-channel 2 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Dell-2#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:14 Ports Te 1/4 (Up) In the ToR unit, configure LACP on the physical ports.
Multicast peer-routing timeout DellEMC# : 150 seconds Verify that the VLT LAG is up in VLT peer unit. Dell-2#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:43:24 Ports Te 1/4 (Up) Dell-4#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:31 Ports Te 1/18 (Up) PVST+ Configuration PVST+ is supported in a VLT domain.
Te 1/10 Te 1/13 128.230 128.233 Interface Name ---------Po 1 Po 2 Te 1/10 Te 1/13 DellEMC# Role -----Desg Desg Desg Desg 128 128 2000 2000 PortID -------128.2 128.3 128.230 128.233 Prio ---128 128 128 128 FWD FWD Cost ------188 2000 2000 2000 0 0 Sts ----------FWD FWD FWD FWD 0 0 90b1.1cf4.9b79 90b1.1cf4.9b79 128.230 128.
Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. DellEMC#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
description To_CR1_fa0/13 no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 1 mode active no shutdown Port channel 1 connects the uplink switch R1. DellEMC#1#sh run int po1 interface Port-channel 1 description port-channel_to_R1 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 1 no shutdown Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1.
Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Peer routing : Peer routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer routing timeout: 6(3) 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bb 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f1 90:b1:1c:f4:01:01 6(3) 90 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds Verify that the heartbeat mechanism is operational DellEMC#1#sh vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: He
The following output displays the MAC address of all interfaces in the system. All interfaces, physical and virtual, have the same MAC address. This is the address used for peer routing.
no shutdown ! DellEMC#1#sh run int te0/1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 description VLTi LINK no ip address no shutdown The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
interface Vlan 800 description Client-VLAN ip address 192.168.8.2/24 tagged Port-channel 2 no shutdown The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backup-destination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer.
router-id 172.17.1.2 network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 172.16.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passiveinterface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1.
interface Loopback3 ip address 3.3.3.2 255.255.255.0 ! interface Loopback4 ip address 4.4.4.2 255.255.255.0 R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4.
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to DellEMC#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has DellEMC#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/16 - 17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.18.130.12 system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b peer-routing unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. ● Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode show vlt backup-link ● Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
UDP Port: 34998 HeartBeat Messages Sent: 1030 HeartBeat Messages Received: 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.20 The following example shows the show vlt statistics command.
Additional VLT Sample Configurations To configure VLT, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, create a VLT domain, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, and connect the peer switches in a VLT domain to an attached access device (switch or server). Review the following examples of VLT configurations. Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 1) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link and interconnect trunk (VLTi).
Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#no ip address Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#channel-member fortyGigE 1/56,60 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-100)#exit Configure the port channel to an attached device.
Table 131. Troubleshooting VLT (continued) Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Dell EMC Networking OS Version mismatch A syslog error message is generated. A syslog error message is generated. Follow the correct upgrade procedure for the unit with the mismatched Dell EMC Networking OS version. Remote VLT port channel status N/A N/A Use the show vlt detail and show vlt brief commands to view the VLT port channel status information.
6. On the Secondary switch (stack-unit1), enter the command stack-unit1 renumber 0. 7. Confirm the reload query. 8. After reloading, confirm that VLT is enabled. 9. Confirm that the management ports are interconnected or connected to a switch that can transfer Heartbeat information. Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN You can configure VLT peer nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
functionalities in a PVLAN. For example, if a VLAN is a primary VLT VLAN on one peer and not a primary VLT VLAN on the other peer, VLTi is not made a part of that VLAN. MAC Synchronization for VLT Nodes in a PVLAN For the MAC addresses that are learned on non-VLT ports, MAC address synchronization is performed with the other peer if the VLTi (ICL) link is part of the same VLAN as the non-VLT port.
Scenarios for VLAN Membership and MAC Synchronization With VLT Nodes in PVLAN The following table illustrates the association of the VLTi link and PVLANs, and the MAC synchronization of VLT nodes in a PVLAN (for various modes of operations of the VLT peers): Table 132.
Table 132.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8. (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Associating the VLT LAG or VLT VLAN in a PVLAN 1. Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2. Enable the port.
show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only nondefault information displays in the show config command output. An ARP proxy operation is performed on the VLT peer node IP address when the peer VLT node is down. The ARP proxy stops working either when the peer routing timer expires or when the peer VLT node goes up. Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level.
VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure VLT peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group. Messages to join the multicast group (Join messages) and data are sent towards the RP, so that receivers can discover who the senders are and begin receiving traffic destined for the multicast group.
DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.16.151.116 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#primary-priority 100 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#system-mac mac-address 00:00:00:11:11:11 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#unit-id 0 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)# DellEMC#show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.16.151.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM 50 Status Active Description DellEMC# Q M M V Ports Po10(Te 1/8) Po20(Te 1/12) Po1(Te 1/30-32) Sample Configuration of VLAN-Stack Over VLT (Peer 2) Configure
DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)# DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown DellEMC# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN DellEMC#show vlan id 50 Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U
VLT node, node2, owing to LAG-level hashing in the ToR switch, it is routed instead of forwarding the packet to node1. This processing occurs because of the match or hit for the entry in the TCAM of the VLT node2. Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a VLT Domain Because the VLT nodes appear as a single unit, the ND entries learned via the VLT interface are expected to be the same on both VLT nodes.
Figure 147. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL. When VLT node 1 receives NS on ICL, it floods the NA packet on the VLAN. If NS is unicast and if it reaches the wrong VLT peer, it is lifted to the CPU using ACL entry.
When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to VLT host, it routes the traffic to VLT interface. If VLT interface is not operationally up VLT node will route the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to North Bound traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to north bound with DMAC as self MAC it routes traffic to next hop.
Static VXLAN Configuration in a VLT setup Configuration steps are covered below: 1. Both Gateway VTEPs need VLT configured. ● ICL port configuration interface Port-channel 1 no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-5 no shutdown ● VLT Domain Configuration vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.70.14 this is ip address of the peer node ● VXLAN Instance Configuration vxlan-instance 1 static local-vtep-ip 14.14.14.
vni-profile test vnid 200 remote-vtep-ip 3.3.3.3 vni-profile test ● VLT Access port configuration interface TengigabitEthernet 0/12 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 30 mode active interface Port-channel 30 no ip address vxlan-instance 1 switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 30 no shutdown 2. Configure loopback interface and VXLAN instances on both the peers. ● Configure loopback interface IP address on both peers with the same IPaddress. interface Loopback 1 ip address 14.14.14.14/32 no shutdown 3.
59 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 149. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: ● Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. ● You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
● Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported. ● When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. ● After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
● You cannot have interface–level LLDP disable commands on the interfaces configured for proxy gateway and you must enable both transmission and reception. ● You must connect both units of the remote VLT domain by the port channel member. ● If you connect more than one port to a unit of the remote VLT domain, the connection must be completed by the time you enable the proxy gateway LLDP. ● You cannot have other conflicting configurations (for example, you cannot have a static proxy gateway configuration).
For VLT Proxy Gateway to work in this scenario you must configure the VLT-peer-mac transmit command under VLT Domain Proxy Gateway LLDP mode, in both C and D (VLT domain 1) and C1 and D1 (VLT domain 2). This behavior is applicable only in the LLDP configuration and not required in the static configuration.
Sample Dynamic Proxy Configuration on C switch or C1 switch Switch_C#conf Switch_C(conf)#vlt domain 1 Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1)#proxy-gateway lldp Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1-pxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel 1.... VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT proxy gateway enables one VLT domain to act as proxy gateway for another VLT domain when a host or virtual machine is moved from one VLT domain to the other VLT domain.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/9 description "To DELL-3 10Gb" no ip address ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 50 mode active no shutdown interface Port-channel 50 description "mVLT port channel to DELL-3" no ip address switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used.
The MAC addresses, configured using the remote-mac-address command, belong to Dell-3 and Dell-4. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF peering VLAN to Dell-1 ip address 10.10.100.2/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-2. router ospf 1 router-id 2.2.2.2 network 10.10.100.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.
ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-3. router ospf 1 router-id 3.3.3.3 network 10.10.101.0/30 area 0 network 10.10.102.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.
60 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 152. VXLAN Gateway NOTE: In a stack setup, the Dell EMC Networking OS does not support VXLAN.
• • Routing in and out of VXLAN tunnels NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
Legacy TOR It is a TOR switch, which performs routing or switching decisions. Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway The following section is the functional overview of VXLAN Gateway: 1. Provides connectivity between a Virtual server infrastructure and a Physical server infrastructure. 2. Provides the functions performed by a VTEP in a virtual server infrastructure. The functions of a VTEP are: ● VTEP is responsible for creating one or more logical networks.
● VLAN: It is optional in a VXLAN implementation and will be designated by an ethertype of 0×8100 and has an associated VLAN ID tag. ● Ethertype: It is set to 0×0800 because the payload packet is an IPv4 packet. The initial VXLAN draft does not include an IPv6 implementation, but it is planned for the next draft. Outer IP Header: The Outer IP Header consists of the following components: ● Protocol: It is set to 0×11 to indicate that the frame contains a UDP packet .
Configuring and Controlling VXLAN from the NSX Controller GUI You can configure and control VXLAN from the NSX controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to NSX and authenticating the device. 1. Generate a certificate in your system and add it to the NSX before adding a hardware device for authentication. To generate a certificate, use the following command: ● crypto cert generate self-signed cert-file flash://vtep-cert.pem key-file flash:// vtep-privkey.
Figure 154. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is required. After connectivity is established between the VTEP and NSX controller, the management IP address and the connectivity status are populated as shown in the following image. Figure 155. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button.
Figure 156. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Click Home > Networking and Security > Logical Switches and click Add. The New Logical Switch window opens. Enter a name and select Unicast as the replication mode and click OK. Figure 157.
In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK. Figure 158. Specify Hardware Port In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, under the VLAN column, enter the VLAN ID and press OK. Figure 159. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button.
Figure 160. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare . Configuring and Controling VXLAN from Nuage Controller GUI The Dell EMC Networking OS supports Nuage controller for VXLAN. You can configure and control VXLAN from the Nuage controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to the Nuage controller and authenticating the device. 1. Under the Infrastructure tab, add a datacenter gateway. Figure 161.
Figure 162. Port-to-VLAN mappings 3. Under the Networks tab, create an L2 domain. Under the L2 domain, create a logical network (VNI) and add access ports of the VTEP in the logical network. Figure 163. Access ports of the VTEP Configuring VxLAN Gateway To configure the VxLAN gateway on the switch, follow these steps: 1. Connecting to NVP controller 2. Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1.
3. Define how the device connects to the controller. VxLAN INSTANCE mode controller controller ID ip address port port-number TCP | SSL The port number range is from 1 to 6632. The default connection type is SSL. TCP, PTCP, and PSSL are supported with NSX controller only. 4. Enter the gateway IP VxLAN INSTANCE mode gateway-ip IP address 5. Enter the maximum backoff time (Optional). VxLAN INSTANCE mode max_backoff time The range is from 1000-180000. The default value is 30000 milliseconds. 6.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance logical-network command. • show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 logical-network Instance : 1 Total LN count : 1024 * - No VLAN mapping exists and yet to be installed Name VNID 1ba08465-8774-3383-ba51-8b7e642ff632 6427 02f063c2-36c7-3ef6-a324-b432b748d15d 6218 36ab6265-5fa8-3ce8-b35c-e7cfdaf7c9e8 6368 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
Examples of the show bfd neighbors command. To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. Dell_GW1#show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT * * * * * * - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr 1.0.1.1 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.0.1.2 192.168.122.135 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.
VNI-PROFILE mode vnid VNID Range 6. Create a remote tunnel and associate the remote VTEP to the VNID. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode remote—vtep—ip remote IP Address vni-profile profile name 7. Enable the VXLAN. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode no shutdown 8. Enable VXLAN instance on the interface. The interface should not be on layer 2. INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance Instance ID 9. Associate VNID to VLAN.
Use the following command to clear the remote VTEP and access port statistics. DellEMC# clear vxlan vxlan-instance 1 statistics Preserving 802.1 p value across VXLAN tunnels The 802.1p QoS marking preservation is supported over the VXLAN tunnel. The 802.1p priority is carried over from the VXLAN tunnel to the remote VTEP—VXLAN tunnel endpoint. The packets egress out to the correct queue based on the priority value. In such a scenario, if there is any congestion in the queue, the system generates a pause.
is/are added as member of the non-vxlan loopback port-channel (P2/P6) and other end interfaces as a member of vxlan loopback port-channel (P3/P7). In this RIOT scheme, whenever R1 tries to reach R2, the packet gets to P1 on VTEP 1 with VLAN 10 and gets routed out of P2 on VLAN 20. VTEP 1 sends an ARP request for R2 (10.1.2.1) through P2. This request gets VXLAN encapsulated at P3 and is sent out of P4. Eventually, the native ARP request reaches R2.
● When you ping for 10.1.2.1 (Vlan 20’s IP on R2) from R1, the packet would get to P1 on VTEP 1 with Vlan 10, and try to get routed out of P2 on Vlan 20. ● VTEP 1 sends an ARP request for 10.1.2.1 out of P2. This gets VXLAN encapsulated at P2, and gets sent out of P3. ● VXLAN encapsulated ARP request lands on VTEP 2 which is decapsulated and sent out of P5 and P6. ● Packets looped back to P5 will not be forwarded again to either to P4 or P6 because of the added ACL rule 4.4.3.
In order for this configuration to work, the physical loopback ports are required to be in port-channels. There are two types of physical loopback interfaces: VXLAN Loopback Port and Non-VXLAN Loopback Port. These two port-channels are implicitly made no spanning tree, so that they do not go into a blocked state if xSTP is enabled. Internal Loopback To configure internal loopback port-channels, add free ports in the device as members of a port-channel, say 10, then configure vxlan-instance 1 loopback.
For VLT, in addition to the masks specified earlier, the VLT specific mask, to disallow frames that ingress on an ICL from going out of a VLT port channel would be permanently in place. These masks won’t be removed for the loopback ports even if the VLT peer LAG goes down (this is a deviation from standard VLT behavior, when these loopbacks are provisioned as VLT port-channels.). NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Apart from static VXLAN for VLT, you can also use an NSX controller for VXLAN in a VLT setup.
Important Points to Remember ● The VLT peer port channel number must be the same on both VLT peers. ● before configuring controller-based VXLAN with VLT, remove any existing standalone VXLAN configuration. ● BFD tunnels come up only after the NSX controller sends tunnel details. The details come after the remote MAC addresses are downloaded from NSX controller. Configure NSX Controller-based VxLAN in VLT Setup You can configure NSX controller-based VxLAN in a VLT setup.
controller controller-ID ip address port port-number TCP | SSL The port number range is from 1 to 6632. The default connection type is SSL. 4. Enter the VxLAN gateway IP adress. VxLAN INSTANCE mode gateway-ip gateway-IP-address 5. Enter the IP address of the peer OVSDB server. peer-ovsdbserver-ip ovsdb-IP-address The peer OVSDB server is the peer VLT device. 6. Enter the fail mode. VxLAN INSTANCE mode fail-mode secure 7. Enable the VxLAN instance.
VLT configuration: DellEMC#show runn vlt ! vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 38.0.0.
Fail Mode Port List Te 1/21 : 10.16.140.183:6640 ssl (connected) : secure : Po 10 Po 11 Po 30 DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC#sh vxlan vxlan-instance 1 logical-network Instance : 1 Total LN count : 1 * - No VLAN mapping exists and yet to be installed Name VNID a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca 5000 DellEMC#$nstance 1 logical-network name a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Name : a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Description : Type : ELAN Tunnel Key : 5000 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 6.6.
DellEMC# DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 unicast-mac-remote Total Remote Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 5000 00:00:bb:00:00:00 4.3.3.
Total LN count : 1 * - No VLAN mapping exists and yet to be installed Name VNID a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca 5000 DellEMC#$nstance 1 logical-network name a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Name : a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Description : Type : ELAN Tunnel Key : 5000 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 6.6.6.
Configuring and Controlling VXLAN from the NSX Controller GUI You can configure and control VXLAN from the NSX controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to NSX and authenticating the device. 1. Generate a certificate in your system and add it to the NSX before adding a hardware device for authentication. To generate a certificate, use the following command: ● crypto cert generate self-signed cert-file flash://vtep-cert.pem key-file flash:// vtep-privkey.
Figure 166. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is required. After connectivity is established between the VTEP and NSX controller, the management IP address and the connectivity status are populated as shown in the following image. Figure 167. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button.
Figure 168. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Click Home > Networking and Security > Logical Switches and click Add. The New Logical Switch window opens. Enter a name and select Unicast as the replication mode and click OK. Figure 169.
In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK. Figure 170. Specify Hardware Port In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, under the VLAN column, enter the VLAN ID and press OK. Figure 171. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button.
Figure 172. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
61 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time.
Figure 173. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the non-default VRF. Table 133. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF 802.
DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1. Enabling VRF in Configuration Mode 2. Creating a Non-Default VRF 3. Assign an Interface to a VRF You can also: ● View VRF Instance Information ● Connect an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance ● Configure VRRP on a VRF Loading VRF CAM ● Load CAM memory for the VRF feature.
2. Assign the interface to management VRF. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip vrf forwarding management Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 3. Assign an IPv4 address to the interface. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip address 10.1.1.1/24 Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 4. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface.
Table 134. Configuring VRRP on a VRF (continued) Task Command Syntax Assign an IP address to the interface Configure the VRRP group and virtual IP address View VRRP command output for the VRF vrf1 Command Mode ip address 10.1.1.1 /24 no shutdown vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.100 show config ----------------------------! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/13 ip vrf forwarding vrf1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.
● ● ● ● ● ● ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd reachable-time — Set advertised reachability time nd retrans-timer — Set NS retransmit interval used and advertised in RA nd suppress-ra — Suppress IPv6 Router Advertisements ad — IPv6 Address Detection ad autoconfig — IPv6 stateless auto-configuration address — Configure IPv6 address on an interface NOTE: The command line help still displays relevant details corresponding to each of these commands.
Figure 175. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
Change Destination --------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 C 20.0.0.0/24 O 21.0.0.0/24 00:10:41 Gateway Dist/Metric ------- ----------- Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Te 1/2 via 2.0.0.
C 11.0.0.
Dynamic Route Leaking Route Leaking is a powerful feature that enables communication between isolated (virtual) routing domains by segregating and sharing a set of services such as VOIP, Video, and so on that are available on one routing domain with other virtual domains. Inter-VRF Route Leaking enables a VRF to leak or export routes that are present in its RTM to one or more VRFs.
ip route-import 1:1 5. Configure the export target in VRF-red. ip route-export 2:2 6. Configure VRF-blue. ip vrf vrf-blue interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-blue ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-blue is created and the interface 1/12 is assigned to it. 7. Configure the import target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 1:1 8. Configure the export target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 3:3 9. Configure VRF-green.
DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 44.4.4.4/32 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 C 144.4.4.0/24 00:00:11 Direct, Te 1/4 0/0 00:32:36 Show routing tables of VRFs( after route-export and route-import tags are configured). DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O C O C 11.1.1.1/32 111.1.1.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 00:00:10 Direct, Te 1/11 0/0 22:39:59 via VRF-shared:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 Direct, VRF-shared:Te 1/4 0/0 00:32:36 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.
You can use the match source-protocol or match ip-address commands to specify matching criteria for importing or exporting routes between VRFs. NOTE: You must use the match source-protocol or match ip-address commands in conjunction with the route-map command to be able to define the match criteria for route leaking. Consider a scenario where you have created two VRF tables VRF-red and VRF-blue. VRF-red exports routes with the export_ospfbgp_protocol route-map to VRF-blue.
The show run output for the above configuration is as follows: ip vrf vrf-Red ip route-export 1:1 export_ospfbgp_protocol ip route-import 2:2 ! this action exports only the OSPF and BGP routes to other VRFs ! ip vrf vrf-Blue ip route-export 2:2 ip route-import 1:1 import_ospf_protocol !this action accepts only OSPF routes from VRF-red even though both OSPF as well as BGP routes are shared The show VRF commands displays the following output: DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue C 122.2.2.
62 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. Topics: • • • • • • VRRP Overview VRRP Benefits VRRP Implementation VRRP Configuration Sample Configurations Proxy Gateway with VRRP VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network.
Figure 176. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 135.
The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
3. Set the backup switches to version 3. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-100)#version 3 Assign Virtual IP addresses Virtual routers contain virtual IP addresses configured for that VRRP group (VRID). A VRRP group does not transmit VRRP packets until you assign the Virtual IP address to the VRRP group.
virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 ! vrrp-group 222 no shutdown The following example shows the same VRRP group (VRID 111) configured on multiple interfaces on different subnets. DellEMC#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Version: 2 Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 125, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 601, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.
INTERFACE-VRID mode no preempt Re-enable preempt by entering the preempt command. When you enable preempt, it does not display in the show commands, because it is a default setting. The following example shows how to disable preempt using the no preempt command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#no preempt DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following example shows how to verify preempt is disabled using the show conf command.
The following example shows how to verify the advertise interval change using the show conf command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell EMC Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group.
● (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked interfaces and objects in VRRP groups, including the time since the last change in an object’s state. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vrrp ● (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show running-config interface interface The following example shows how to configure tracking using the track command.
The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface. DellEMC#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 1/8 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/8 no ip address ipv6 address 2007::30/64 vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot.
support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. The VRRP topology was created using the CLI configuration shown in the following example. Figure 177. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.
R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/31, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.
Figure 178. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP addre
Both Switch-1 and Switch-2 have three VRF instances defined: VRF-1, VRF-2, and VRF-3. Each VRF has a separate physical interface to a LAN switch and an upstream VPN interface to connect to the Internet. Both Switch-1 and Switch-2 use VRRP groups on each VRF instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the owner-master and Switch-2 is the backup.
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 2 will be 178. S1(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-101)#priority 100 S1(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S1(conf-if-te-1/2)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
VLAN Scenario In another scenario, to connect to the LAN, VRF-1, VRF-2, and VRF-3 use a single physical interface with multiple tagged VLANs (instead of separate physical interfaces). In this case, you configure three VLANs: VLAN-100, VLAN-200, and VLAN-300. Each VLAN is a member of one VRF. A physical interface (tengigabitethernet 1/1 ) attaches to the LAN and is configured as a tagged interface in VLAN-100, VLAN-200, and VLAN-300. The rest of this example is similar to the non-VLAN scenario.
Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 20.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
Figure 180. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 DellEMC#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 TenGigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 DellEMC# D
Proxy Gateway with VRRP VLT proxy gateway solves the inefficient traffic trombone problem when VLANs are extended between date centers and when VMs are migrated between the two DCs. Starting from Dell EMC Networking OS 9.14.0.0, VRRP provides a much simpler method to solve the traffic trombone problem. This is achieved by configuring same VRRP group IDs to the extended L3 VLANs and VRRP stays active-active across all four VLT nodes even though they are in two different VLT domains.
NOTE: The following configuration assumes that all VLT-related settings are already present on the respective devices. Sample configuration of C1: vlt domain 10 peer-link port-channel 128 back-up destination 10.16.140.
int ten 1/5/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 10 mode active no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.2/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.
int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.3/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.0/24 area 0 Sample configuration of D2: vlt domain 10 peer-link port-channel 128 back-up destination 10.16.140.
63 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • Offline Diagnostics Trace Logs Auto Save on Crash or Rollover Hardware Watchdog Timer Enabling Environmental Monitoring Buffer Tuning Troubleshooting Packet Loss Enabling Application Core Dumps Mini Core Dumps Enabling TCP Dumps Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware.
NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack-unit command: Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y After the system goes offline, you must reload or run the online stack-unit stack-unit-number command for the normal operation. 2. Confirm the offline status.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up AC up 18048 0 1 absent absent 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up up 19275 up 19275 0 1 up up 19275 up 19275 0 2 absent Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit).
**************************** S6000 LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS************************** Test 1 - Board Revision Test ........................................ PASS Test 2 - Cpu Type Detect Test ....................................... PASS Test 3.000 - Psu0 Presence Test ..................................... PASS diagS6000PsuPresenceTest[1022]: ERROR: Psu:1 is not present... Test 3.001 - Psu1 Presence Test ..................................... NOT PRESENT Test 3 - Psu Presence Test ..................................
I2C Devices Scanned - 20 I2C Device PASS Count - 17 I2C Device FAIL Count - 3 Test 13 - I2c Access Test ........................................... Test 14 - RTC Presence Test ......................................... Test 15 - CPU Sdram Presence Test ................................... Test 16 - CPU Sdram Size Test ...................................... Test 17.000 - System Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.001 - Master Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 Length(OM1) 1m = 0x00 Length(Copper) 1m = 0x00 Vendor Rev = 01 Laser Wavelength = 850.
Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit2 55 60 75 80 85 ---------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit3 55 60 75 80 85 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1. Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2. Check air flow through the system. Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly. 3.
Table 136. SNMP Traps and OIDs (continued) OID String OID Name Description .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.5 dellNetFpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
● show hardware {ip | ipv6 | mac} {eg-acl | in-acl} stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 pipeline 0-3 ● show hardware ip qos stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 ● show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 {counters | pipeline 0-3} ● show hardware drops interface interface ● show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface interface ● show hardware buffer inteface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { id| all} } buffer-info ● show hardware buffer-stats-sn
Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HOL DROPS on COS5 HOL DROPS on COS6 HOL DROPS on COS7 HOL DROPS on COS8 HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS14 HOL DROPS on COS15 HOL DROPS on COS16 HOL DROPS on COS17 TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops ---
rxPkt(COS2 ) :0 rxPkt(COS3 ) :0 rxPkt(COS4 ) :0 rxPkt(COS5 ) :0 rxPkt(COS6 ) :0 rxPkt(COS7 ) :0 rxPkt(COS8 ) :773 rxPkt(COS9 ) :0 rxPkt(COS10) :0 rxPkt(COS11) :0 rxPkt(UNIT0) :773 transmitted :12698 txRequested :12698 noTxDesc :0 txError :0 txReqTooLarge :0 txInternalError :0 txDatapathErr :0 txPkt(COS0 ) :0 txPkt(COS1 ) :0 txPkt(COS2 ) :0 txPkt(COS3 ) :0 txPkt(COS4 ) :0 txPkt(COS5 ) :0 txPkt(COS6 ) :0 txPkt(COS7 ) :0 txPkt(COS8 ) :0 txPkt(COS9 ) :0 txPkt(COS10) :0 txPkt(COS11) :0 txPkt(UNIT0) :0 Example of
Display Stack Member Counters You can use the show hardware command to display internal receive and transmit statistics, based on the selected command option. The following example is a sample of the output for the counters option.
RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter --------------------Interface Fo 0/60 : Description RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV6 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter
RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter RX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter RX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter RX - Good Packet Counter RX - Packet/Frame Counter RX - Unicast Frame Counter RX - Multicast Frame Counter RX - Broadcast
A mini core dump contains critical information in the event of a crash. Mini core dump files are located in flash:/ (root dir). The application mini core filename format is f10StkUnit..acore.mini.txt. The kernel mini core filename format is f10StkUnit.kcore.mini.txt. The following are sample filenames. When a member or standby unit crashes, the mini core file gets uploaded to master unit.
You can use the capture-duration timer and the packet-count counter at the same time. The TCP dump stops when the first of the thresholds is met. That means that even if the duration timer is 9000 seconds, if the maximum file count parameter is met first, the dumps stop. To enable a TCP dump, use the following command. ● Enable a TCP dump for CPU bound traffic.
64 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 137.
Table 137. General Internet Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 6 0 Transfer Protocol 2 4 7 4 Definition of 7.7.1 the Differentiate d Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 PPP over 61 SONET/SD 5 H 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 6 9 8 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Table 138. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 103 DOMAIN NAMES 5 IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 104 A Standard for the 2 Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1191 Path MTU Discovery 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
Table 139. General IPv6 Protocols (continued) RFC Full Name # S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 246 2 (Par tial) IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 246 4 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
Table 140. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) (continued) RFC# Full Name SSeries/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048TON S6010–ON 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2918 Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 3065 Autonomous System Confederations for BGP 7.8.1 9.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 142. Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1142 OSI IS-IS Intra-Domain Routing Protocol (ISO DP 10589) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1195 Use of OSI IS-IS for Routing in TCP/IP and Dual Environments 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for RIP protocol. Table 143. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 105 8 Routing Information Protocol 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 245 RIP Version 3 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4191 Default Router Preferences and More-Specific Routes 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1156 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1157 A Simple Network Management 7.6.1 Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1212 Concise MIB Definitions 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name 2575 S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON View-based Access Control 7.6.1 Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2576 Coexistence Between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-standard Network Management Framework 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, High-Capacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3580 IEEE 802.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON IEEE Management Information Base 802.1A module for LLDP configuration, B statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) IEEE The LLDP Management 802.1A Information Base extension B module for IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined discovery information. (LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOT3 MIB) 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name FORC E10-IFEXTEN SIONMIB S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Force10 Enterprise IF Extension 7.6.1 MIB (extends the Interfaces portion of the MIB-2 (RFC 1213) by providing proprietary SNMP OIDs for other counters displayed in the "show interfaces" output) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORC E10LINKA GGMIB Force10 Enterprise Link Aggregation MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 145. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON ALAR M-MIB MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/Login.aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login.
65 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.509v3 support in Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
Advantages of X.509v3 certificates Public key authentication is preferred over password-based authentication, although both may be used in conjunction, for various reasons. Public-key authentication provides the following advantages over normal password-based authentication: ● Public-key authentication avoids the human problems of low-entropy password selection and provides more resistance to brute-force attacks than password-based authentication.
The other hosts on the network, such as the SUT switch, syslog server, and OCSP server, generate private keys and create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs). The hosts then upload the CSRs to the Intermediate CA or make the CSRs available for the Intermediate CA to download. generates a CSR using the crypto cert generate request command. The hosts on the network (SUT, syslog, OCSP…) also download and install the CA certificates from the Root and Intermediate CAs.
After the CA certificate is installed, the system can secure communications with TLS servers by verifying certificates that are signed by the CA. Installing CA certificate To install a CA certificate, enter the crypto ca-cert install {path} command in Global Configuration mode. Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.
● ● ● ● ● Common Name Email address Validity Length Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic.
Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional. The default behavior is to not use these two options.
Verifying Client Certificates Verifying client certificates is optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria. However, TLS-protected Syslog and RADIUS protocols mandate that certificate-based mutual authentication be performed. Event logging The system logs the following events: ● A CA certificate is installed or deleted. ● A self-signed certificate and private key are generated. ● An existing host certificate, a private key, or both are deleted.
